ev3100 variable speed drive for elevator user manual · 2 chapter 1 information and precautions...
TRANSCRIPT
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual Version: V1.1 Revision date: April 14, 2006 BOM: 31011255
Emerson Network Power provides customers with technical support. Users may contact the nearest Emerson local sales office or service center.
Copyright © 2005 by Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. The contents in this document are subject to change without notice.
Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
Address: No.1 Kefa Rd., Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District 518057, Shenzhen China
Homepage: www.emersonnetworkpower.com.cn
Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581
Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800
E-mail: [email protected]
Statement
Summary
This manual will guide you through the installation, operation and maintenance of Emerson EV3100 drives. This manual can serve as reference book for elevator system design using EV3100 drives.
Reader Group
User
Drive engineer
Maintenance personnel
Technical support engieer
Precautions
D anger! : Practices or circumstances that may lead to personal injuries or death, property damages or economic loss
A tten tion! : practices or circumstances that may lead to, compared with that of DANGER, less serious personal injuries, property damages or economic loss.
Prologue Thank you for choosing EV3100 series elevator drives manufactured by Emerson Network Power Co. Ltd.
EV3100 series are multifunctional, quality and quiet vector control drives developed by Emerson Network Power. It can drive both the asynchronous motors and synchronous motors. It features compact structure and easy installation. To realize high precision system control, it is designed with intelligent control functions such as vector control algorithm, distance control algorithm, motor parameter auto-tuning, torque offset, auto-learn, brake & contactor control and pre-opening signal output. To realize the total solution of elevator control, EV3100 drive has multiple running modes, normal programmable digital input and logic programmable digital input. The brake & contactor detection, elevator over-speed detection, leveling signal and elevator position detection ensures system safety. In addition, the internationalized standard design and testing ensures drives’ reliability.
Read this manual carefully before using EV3100 series drives to ensure correct usage. Besides, please keep this book accessible for later repairing and maintenance.
Contents
Chapter 1 Information And Precautions............... 1 1.1 Unpacking Inspection ............................ 1 1.2 Model Designation Rules ...................... 1 1.3 Nameplate............................................. 1 1.4 Precautions ........................................... 2 1.5 Others ................................................... 2 1.6 Influence On Motor And Mechanical Loads ............................................................. 3 1.7 Disposing Unwanted Drive .................... 3
Chapter 2 Models And Specifications.................. 4 2.1 Model .................................................... 4 2.2 Technical Specifications........................ 4 2.3 Drive Dimensions .................................. 5
2.3.1 External Dimensions .................. 5 2.3.2 Operation Panel Dimensions ..... 6
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring ........................ 7 3.1 Installation ............................................. 7
3.1.1 Installation Environment............. 7 3.1.2 Installation Clearance................. 7 3.1.3 Drive Components ..................... 7 3.1.4 Mounting/dismounting Operation Panel ..................................................... 8 3.1.5 Mounting/dismounting Cover Board..................................................... 8
3.2 Wiring .................................................... 9 3.2.1 Wiring Of External Devices ........ 9 3.2.2 Basic Connection ..................... 10 3.2.3 Power Terminal And Earth Terminal .............................................. 12 3.2.4 Terminals Of Control Board & Interface Board .................................... 14
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 22 4.1 Drive Terms......................................... 22
4.1.1 Operation Mode ....................... 22 4.1.2 Control Mode ........................... 22 4.1.3 Running Mode.......................... 22 4.1.4 Work State ............................... 23
4.2 Keypad Operation ............................... 23 4.2.1 Keypad Introduction ................. 23 4.2.2 Key Description........................ 24 4.2.3 Indicator Description ................ 24
4.2.4 Keypad Display In Various Modes............................................................. 25
4.3 Keypad Operation Process.................. 26 4.3.1 Keypad Operation .................... 26 4.3.2 Parameter Configuration .......... 27 4.3.3 Parameters Displayed By LED. 27 4.3.4 Parameter Copying .................. 28 4.3.5 User Password......................... 28 4.3.6 Parameter Tuning .................... 28
4.4 Getting Started .................................... 30 4.4.1 Power On Inspection................ 30 4.4.2 Running Check......................... 30 4.4.3 Basic Operations...................... 30
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes ................ 32 5.1 Conventions ........................................ 32 5.2 Function Codes ................................... 32
5.2.1 Function Groups....................... 32 5.2.2 Table Of Function Codes ......... 32
5.3 Factory Function Description............... 42
Chapter 6 Function Code Description................ 43 6.1 Basic Functions (F0.00 ~ F0.10) ......... 43 6.2 Traction Machine Parameters (F1.00 ~ F1.17)........................................................... 45 6.3 Vector Control (F2.00 ~ F2.20)............ 47 6.4 Speed Curve (F3.00 ~ F3.28).............. 51 6.5 Distance Control (F4.00 ~ F4.57) ........ 55 6.6 Digital I/O (F5.00 ~ F5.40) ................... 56 6.7 Analog I/O (F6.00 ~ F6.06).................. 63 6.8 Optimal Option (F7.00 ~ F7.08)........... 65 6.9 Communication Parameters (F8.00 ~ F8.04)........................................................... 66 6.10 Keypad Monitoring (F9.00 ~ F9.21)... 66 6.11 PG Function (FA.00 ~ FA.07) ............ 68
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance .......... 70 7.1 Basic Procedures Of Elevator Application..................................................................... 70
7.1.1 Requirement Analysis .............. 70 7.1.2 Confirm Your System Configuration ....................................... 70 7.1.3 Wiring Design........................... 71 7.1.4 Field Installation And Wiring..... 71 7.1.5 Wiring Check & Preparation ..... 71 7.1.6 Commissioning & Test ............. 71 7.1.7 Special Elevator Function Code71
7.1.8 Tests And Parameter Tuning ... 74 7.1.9 Operation And Maintenance .... 74
7.2 Elevator Running Mode....................... 74 7.2.1 MS Running ............................. 74 7.2.2 Distance Control Running ........ 76 7.2.3 Common Running .................... 77 7.2.4 Autolearning............................. 78 7.2.5 Inspection Running .................. 79 7.2.6 Battery Driven Running ............ 80
7.3 Typical Application .............................. 81 7.3.1 Example One (MS Running) .... 81 7.3.2 Example Two (Floor-signal Distance Control)................................. 83 7.3.3 Example Three (Stop-Request Distance Control)................................. 85
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ................................ 88 8.1 Error Codes And Solutions.................. 88 8.2 Elevator Related Faults ....................... 90 8.3 Fault Reset .......................................... 91
Chapter 9 Maintenance ..................................... 92 9.1 Routine Maintenance .......................... 92 9.2 Periodic Maintenance.......................... 93 9.3 Quick Wear Parts ................................ 93 9.4 Storage................................................ 93 9.5 Warranty.............................................. 94
Chapter 10 Accessories..................................... 95 10.1 Braking Assembly.............................. 95
10.1.1 Braking Unit Model................. 95 10.1.2 Braking Unit Dimensions........ 95 10.1.3 Function And Wiring............... 95
10.2 AC/DC Reactor & Power Factor Regulator ..................................................... 95 10.3 EMI Filter ........................................... 96 10.4 Communication Software .................. 96 10.5 Keyboard Cables & Adapter .............. 96 10.6 Serial Communication Protocol ......... 96
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance .... 97 1 Noise Suppression ................................. 97
1.1 Noise Type .................................. 97 1.2 Transmission Paths..................... 97 1.3 Noise Suppression Methods ....... 97
2 Wiring Requirement................................ 98 3 Grounding............................................... 99
3.1 Grounding Methods..................... 99 3.2 Grounding Cable Connection Instructions .......................................... 99
4 Installation Of Surge Absorber ............. 100 5 Leakage Current And Its Handling Method................................................................... 100
5.1 Ground Leakage Current .......... 100 5.2 Inter-cable Leakage Current...... 100
6 Suppression Of Drive Radiation ........... 101 7 Power Line Filter Application Instruction................................................................... 101
7.1 Effect Of Power Line Filter ........ 101 7.2 Power Line Filter Installation Instruction .......................................... 101
8 Drive EMC Installation Area Classification................................................................... 102 9 Drive Electrical Installation Instruction .. 102 10 Satisfied EMC Standards ................... 103
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol ............... 105 1 Network Topology................................. 105 2 Interfaces.............................................. 105 3 Communication Modes......................... 105 4 Protocol Format .................................... 105 5 Protocol function................................... 106 6 Note:..................................................... 111 7 CRC Check .......................................... 111 8 Application............................................ 112 9 Scaling.................................................. 114
Chapter 1 Information And Precautions 1
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 1 Information And Precautions
Introduction:
This chapter provides you with general information about how to identify and inspect the drive. In addition, this chapter details the general precautions during installation, wiring, operation, maintenance and scrapping, which is very helpful for a safe and long drive operation. Read this chapter carefully.
1.1 Unpacking Inspection
Upon unpacking, confirm the following:
No damage occurred during transportation.
The rated values on the drive nameplate are in accordance with your order.
If you find anything wrong, please contact us or the distributor.
1.2 Model Designation Rules
EV3100 - 4 T 0075 E
Drive series
Motor power (kW )
0055007501100150018502200300
5.57.5111518.52230
E
Drive type
For elevator
Input voltage
3ph
Code
T
VoltageCode
4 380V
Code
1
Drive structure
Same as TD3100New structure
Null
Code
Code
1.3 Nameplate
On the right bottom of the drive case is the nameplate, which is shown in Fig.1-1. A bar code that contains the drive’s information is pasted to the socket of drive keypad, as shown in Fig.1-2.
Barcode
NameplateEmerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
EV3100-4T0075E7.5kW
11kVA 17A 0~99.99Hz 380V
Motor capacityMODEL:
POWER:
INPUT:
OUTPUT:
S/N:
3PH AC 380V 18A 50Hz/60Hz Rated input voltage,current and frequencyRated output capacity,current, frequency andvoltage
002 002 001
Drive model
Figure 1-1 Nameplate Figure 1-2 Nameplate and bar code position
2 Chapter 1 Information And Precautions
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
1.4 Precautions
DangerMount the drive on nonflammable material, or fire may occur.
!
There should be no combustibles nearby, or fire may occur.The air should be free of explosive gases, or explosion mayoccur.The drive containing cabinet should meet EN50178 standard.
AttentionDo not move the drive by its keypad or cover plate lest it shouldfall and get damaged.
!
The installation platform should be strong enough to sustain thedrive.The installation position should be free of dripping water.
Make sure no screw, washer or metal bar can fall into the drive.W hen damaged or short of parts, the drive should not bepowered, or accident may occur.
THe drive should not be subject to direct sun shine.
Attention!Only professionals can do the wiring, or electric shock may occur.Make sure to cut off power before the wiring operation, or electricshock may occur.Ground the PE terminal of the drive, or electric shock may occur.The drive's power input terminals must not be confused with theoutput terminals, otherwise damage or explosion may occur.Do not short terminal (+)/P1/PB with terminal (-), otherwise fire ordamage may occur.
Put cover plate back before powering on the drive, otherwiseelectric shock or explosion may occur.
Do not touch the terminals or the case of a powered drive withbare hands, otherwise electric shock may occur.
Do not operate drive with wet hands, or electric shock may occur.
Powering on a drive that has been idle for over 2 years requiresslow voltage rise with a booster, or electric shock and explosionmay occur.
The connection of emergency stop safety circuit needs to bedouble checked.
Attention!The power-on of a drive that has been idle for more than 2 yearsreqiures slow voltage rise with a booster, otherwise electricshock or explosion may occur.
Misoperation over a running drive may cause high-volt electricshock!Dangerous high-volt still exists in a drive just powered off.Only trained & authorized personnel can maintain the drive .Before the maintenance, take off all metal objects such as wristwatch and ring. The cloths and tools must meet insulationrequirements.
Danger!
For precautions in installation, wiring and maintenance, refer to the related chapters.
1.5 Others
Note the following when using EV3100 drive:
Recommended braking assembly for driving geopotential load
The elevator is a geopotential load, while motors with geopotential load will have negative torque. Braking assembly should be used to avoid the tripping due to overcurrent or overvoltage. EV3100 drives of 30kW or above should be mounted with external braking unit and resistor, while EV3100 drives of 22kW or below, with their built-in braking units, need only the external braking resistor.
Removal of capacitors or surge current absorption piezoresistors at drive output side
The drive outputs pulse wave, and capacitors or piezoresistors at drive output side may cause trip or damage the drive. Be sure to remove capacitors or piezoresistors at drive output side, as shown in the following figure.
MEV3100U
V
W
Fig. 1-3 No capacitors allowed at drive output side
Feeding EV3100 series drives with rated voltage
EV3100 series drives are suitable for running at its rated voltage. If power source cannot provide needed voltage, use a transformer to change the voltage.
Feeding EV3100 series drive with 3-phase input
Do not change the 3-phase input into 2-phase, or fault will occur.
Protection against lightning
The drive has built-in lightning-proof devices that provide certain level of protection against lightning.
Controlling output contactor with user program
If it is the user program, not the EV3100 CRA-CRC, that controls the output contactor, it is suggested to close the contactor before operation commands are sent to the drive, and open it 1 second after stop command, so as to ensure that the contactor is operated without current.
Altitude and derating
At altitudes above 1,000m, derating is necessary due to worsened cooling effect. See Fig. 1-4.
Chapter 1 Information And Precautions 3
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
100%
90%
80%
1000 400030002000 (m)
Iout
Figure 1-4 Drive rated output current vs. altitude
1.6 Influence On Motor And
Mechanical Loads
Slight increase in motor’s temperature, noise and vibration
EV3100 series drive outputs PWM voltage wave with certain harmonic. Therefore motor’s temperature, noise and vibration may increase slightly compared with mains frequency operation.
Not suitable for long-term low speed operation
If the drive drives common motor at low speed for a long time, due to bad cooling effect, the motor temperature will rise. When long-term low-speed operation is needed, you
should use the variable-frequency motor with independent cooling system.
Reset motor electronic thermal protection value
The drive is equipped with overload electronic thermal protection device, which is usually controlled by preset motor current parameters. If the ratings of the driven motor are not in compliance with the drive, adjust the protection threshold to ensure motor’s safety.
Motor’s speed limit at frequencies above 50Hz
When the drive runs at above 50Hz, besides the increase in vibration and noise, you need to know the speed that the shaft and other mechanical devices can bear.
Lubrication of mechanical devices
In the long-term low-speed operation, the lubricant in mechanical devices such as gearbox and geared motor will deteriorate. Read the motor user manual first.
1.7 Disposing Unwanted Drive
When disposing the drive, pay attention to the following factors:
1. The capacitors may explode when they are burnt.
2. Poisonous gases may be generated when plastic parts like front covers are burnt.
Disposing method: Dispose as industrial waste.
4 Chapter 2 Models And Specifications
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 2 Models And Specifications
2.1 Model
Model Rated capacitor (kVA) Rated input current (A) Rated output current (A) Applicable drive (kW) EV3100-4T0055E 8.5 14.2 13 5.5 EV3100-4T0075E 11 18 17 7.5 EV3100-4T0110E 17 26 25 11 EV3100-4T0150E 21 35 32 15 EV3100-4T0185E 24 38.5 37 18.5 EV3100-4T0220E 30 46.5 45 22 EV3100-4T0300E 37 62 60 30
2.2 Technical Specifications
Item Item description Rated voltage/frequency 3-phase, 380V, 50Hz/60Hz
Input Fluctuation rate Voltage: 15%. Voltage unbalance rate < 3%. Frequency: 5% Output voltage 3-phase, 0 ~ 380V Output frequency 0Hz ~ 99.99Hz Output Overload ability 150% rated output current for 2 minutes, or 180% rated output current for 10s
Control mode Asynchronous open-loop vector control, asynchronous close-loop vector control, synchronous close-loop vector control
Speed setting Digital setting, analog setting, host computer setting Speed control accuracy With PG: 0.1% max. speed (25 C 10 C, 1,000P/r) Speed setting precision Digital setting: 0.001m/s. Analog setting: 0.1% max. speed Speed control range Close loop with PG 1: 1,000
Basic control functions
Command input mode Keypad input (for commissioning), terminal input, input through host computer Floor-signal distance control According to the preset destination floor, the drive stops through distance control Stop-request distance control The drive stops through distance control realized by the stop request signal from control boardSpeed control Including normal running
Special running control Including inspection running, auto-learn running, battery driven running and forced Dec running
Inspection running A running mode for elevator inspection, when the elevator is commissioned at low speed Auto-learn running A mode for elevator shaft autolearning. The pulse number of each floor height is recorded Battery-driven running Upon power failure, the battery will drive the elevator to level at low speed
Forced Dec running When the elevator runs to the forced Dec switch at a speed higher than the preset value, the drive will force it to level at low speed
Torque offset At startup, the drive can output pre-torque according to the load signal (digital or analog) of the elevator to prevent reversion. Range: +150% ~ -150% rated torque.
Normal Acc/Dec The Acc/Dec speed during normal running. Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2
Normal Acc/Dec change rate The Acc/Dec speed change rate at the start & end sections of the operation curve are adjustable. Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3
Inspection Acc/Dec The Acc/Dec speed during inspection running. Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 Battery driven Acc/Dec The Acc/Dec speed during battery-driven running. Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2
Elevator control functions
Forced Dec The Dec speed during forced Dec running. Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2
Chapter 2 Models And Specifications 5
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Item Item description
PG power supply PG for asynchronous motor: 12V, 250mA (on interface board), or 5V, 100mA (on control board) PG for synchronous motor: 5V, 100mA (on control board)
PG signal PG for asynchronous motor: 12V open collector or 12V push-pull input (on interface board), or 5V differential (on control board) PG for synchronous motor: 5V differential SinCos/UVW (on control board)
PG frequency dividing output OA and OB are perpendicular. Frequency-division factor: 1 ~ 128. Open collector output. Current: <100mA
Analog voltage/current input AI1: 0 ~ +10Vdc or 0 ~ +20mA voltage/current signal optional AI2+, AI2-: 0~ +10Vdc differential input
Analog voltage output Two outputs: AO1 and AO2. 0 ~ +10Vdc Digital control input FWD/REV command, FWD/REV leveling signal Programmable digital input Fourteen inputs: X1 ~ X14, with input options
Open-collector output Two outputs: Y1 and Y2, with output options 24Vdc/50mA. Output resistance: 30 ~ 35
Relay output Three outputs: BR, CR and TR, with output options Resistive, 250Vac/2A (COS =1), 250Vac/1A (COS = 0.4), 30Vdc/1A
I/O control signal
Communication ports RS232/RS485, optional through jumper CN17 on the control board RS232: used by the host for monitoring and commissioning RS485: for communication and control
Display 4-digit LED and Chinese/English LCD
Displays parameters such as: elevator speed, motor speed, output frequency, output voltage, output current, output power, present floor, present position, I/O terminal state, analog input, Dec distance and forced Dec distance.
Location In doors, without direct sunlight, dust, corrosive/explosive gases, oil fog, vapor, water dripping, or salty substances
Altitude < 1,000m (derate when above 1,000m) Ambient temperature -10 C ~ +50 C (remove the cover at +50 C, derate when above 40 C) Humidity 5% ~ 95%rh, non-condensing Vibration <5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
Environment
Storage temperature -40 C ~ +70 C Protection class IP20
Structure Cooling Forced air cooling
Installation Wall mounting (within cabinet)
2.3 Drive Dimensions
2.3.1 External Dimensions
Figure 2-1 EV3100-4T0055E ~ EV3100-4T0075E
Figure2-2 EV3100-4T0110E ~ EV3100-4T0150E
6 Chapter 2 Models And Specifications
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
AW
B HD
Figure 2-3 EV3100-4T0185E ~ EV3100-4T0300E
Drive model Motor power
(kW) A (mm) B (mm) H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Installation hole (mm)
Corresponding figure
Gross weight (kg)
EV3100-4T0055E 5.5 186 285 300 200 202 6.8 Figure 2-1 7.5 EV3100-4T0075E 7.5 186 285 300 200 202 6.8 Figure 2-1 7.5 EV3100-4T0110E 11 236 365 380 250 209 6.8 Figure 2-2 12 EV3100-4T0150E 15 236 365 380 250 209 6.8 Figure 2-2 12 EV3100-4T0185E 18.5 200 486 500 310 256 7 Figure 2-3 15 EV3100-4T0220E 22 200 486 500 310 256 7 Figure 2-3 15 EV3100-4T0300E 30 250 604.5 622 360 255 9 Figure 2-3 23
2.3.2 Operation Panel Dimensions
Figure 2-4 Operation panel dimensions
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 7
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
Introduction: This chapter introduces to you the installation, wiring and usage of the drive as well as the notes to follow. Please follow the steps in this chapter to finish the installation and wiring.
3.1 Installation
3.1.1 Installation Environment
DangerMount the drive on nonflammable material, or fire may occur.
!
There should be no combustibles nearby, or fire may occur.The air should be free of explosive gases, or explosion mayoccur.The drive containing cabinet should meet EN50178 standard.
AttentionDo not move the drive by its keypad or cover plate lest it shouldfall and get damaged.
!
The installation platform should be strong enough to sustain thedrive.The installation position should be free of dripping water.
Make sure no screw, washer or metal bar can fall into the drive.W hen damaged or short of parts, the drive should not bepowered, or accident may occur.
THe drive should not be subject to direct sun shine.
Install the drive vertically indoors with good ventilation.
1. Temperature: -10 C ~ +40 C. Above +40 C, decrease the power by 20% at the rise of every 5 C.
2. Humidity: < 90%rh, non-condensing.
3. Keep the environment clear of dust or metal particles.
4. There should be no corrosive or explosive gases.
5. Vibration: <5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
6. No direct sunshine.
If you have any special installation requirements, please contact us first.
3.1.2 Installation Clearance
See Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.
When one drive is mounted atop another, a baffle plate should be used to isolate them, as shown in Figure 3-2.
10cmor above
5cmor above
5cmor above
10cmor above
air expulsion by fan
Figure 3-1 Installation clearance
Drive
Drive
Figure 3-2 Installation of multiple drives
3.1.3 Drive Components
See Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 for the names and locations of various drive components.
8 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Keypadconnection hole
Control cable inlet
Power circuit terminal
Bottom installation hole
Interface board
Control board
Control board terminalCharge indicator
Ventilation opening
Installation hole forcover board
Cover board
Keypad socket
Interface boardterminal
Figure 3-3 Components of 15kW drives and below
Keypad socket
Cover board
Fixing hole of cover board
Ventilation opening
Nameplate
Control cable inlet
Control boardKeypad connection hole
Control board terminal
Power circuit terminal
Output bus bar
Control cable inlet
Fixed base board
Bottom installation hole
Input bus barShielding plate Installation slot
Interface board
Interface board terminal
Figure 3-4 Components of 18.5kW drives and above
3.1.4 Mounting/dismounting Operation Panel
Dismounting: Put your mid finger into the hole on top of the operation panel, press the spring and pull outward, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Mounting: Align the fixing hole on operation panel with the installation claw at the bottom line of the panel socket. Press the spring on top of the panel and push inward until the panel is in position. Release the spring then. See Figure 3-5.
HookMounting claw
Mounting claw
Figure 3-5 Mounting/dismounting operation panel
3.1.5 Mounting/dismounting Cover Board
To mount/dismount the plastic cover board of EV3100 elevator drives, follow the instructions below. See Figure 3-6.
Dismounting:
1. Remove the operation panel.
2. Remove the two screws on the bottom.
3. Tilt the cover bottom by 5 ~ 10 degrees. Move it downward 10mm until the installation claw on the cover is detached from the casing hook. The cover can then be removed completely from the casing.
Mounting:
1. Place the cover at 5 ~ 10 degrees with the casing.
2. Make the installation claw bite the installation hook.
3. Tighten the screws on the bottom.
4. Mount the operation panel.
Figure 3-6 Mounting/dismounting cover board
Note Do not jerk out the cover board horizontally, or the installation claw may be damaged.
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 9
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
3.2 Wiring
Attention!Only professionals can do the wiring, or electric shock may occur.Make sure to cut off power before the wiring operation, or electricshock may occur.Ground the PE terminal of the drive, or electric shock may occur.The drive's power input terminals must not be confused with theoutput terminals, otherwise damage or explosion may occur.Do not short terminal (+)/P1/PB with terminal (-), otherwise fire ordamage may occur.
Put cover plate back before powering on the drive, otherwiseelectric shock or explosion may occur.
Do not touch the terminals or the case of a powered drive withbare hands, otherwise electric shock may occur.
Do not operate drive with wet hands, or electric shock may occur.
Powering on a drive that has been idle for over 2 years requiresslow voltage rise with a booster, or electric shock and explosionmay occur.
The connection of emergency stop safety circuit needs to bedouble checked.
AttentionMake sure the input AC voltage meets the drive rated voltage.
!
Drive's dielectric strength has been tested. Do not test again.Refer to Chapter 10 to select the brake resistor and brake unit.The power terminal and cable lug connection must be secure.No control terminal except the relay can be input with 220Vacsignal.The bare part of the power cable lug must be wrapped withinsulation tape, or electric shock may occur.
Pay attention to the following points during drive wiring:
1. Be sure to connect MCCB or fuse between power supply and drive input terminals R, S and T. See Table 3-1 for MCCB specifications.
2. Be sure to use stranded copper-core cables ( 3.5mm2 or above) with grounding resistance smaller than 10 as the earth wire. The dedicated yellow-green earth wire is recommended.
3. Ensure the reliability and correctness during each wiring step.
4. The wiring can be conducted only after the power to the drive has been cut off.
Note
It takes time for the DC filtering capacitor to discharge completely. To ensure safety, you should wait till the Charge indicator is off and the DC voltage is lower than 36V before you can touch the drive cables.
3.2.1 Wiring Of External Devices
M
AC reactor
EMI filter
AC reactor
MCCB or ELCB
PE
Input contactor
EMI filter
S T
PE
EV3100
R PE
STPE
R
VU W
PE
PE
PE
PE
3ph ACinput power
Output contactor
Figure 3-7 Wiring of external devices
1. Check that the input AC voltage matches drive’s rated voltage.
2. MCCB and ELCB
Be sure to connect Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) between the power source and drive input terminals R, S and T. See Table 3-1 for the related spec. Do not use the MCCB or ELCB to power on/off the drive.
3. AC reactor at input side
You can use the AC reactor to improve the power factor and reduce high harmonic current at input side.
4. EMI filter at input side
You can use EMI filter at drive input side to suppress the high frequency noise of the power cables.
5. Contactor at input side
You can use the contactor at input side to cut off power upon system protection and reduce damage.
Do not use the contactor at input side to power on/off the drive.
6. Contactor at output side
As specified by the elevator safety regulations, contactors should be used at output side.
7. EMI filter at output side
You can use EMI filter at drive output side to suppress the noise and leakage current of the drive.
8. AC reactor at output side
You can use the AC reactor at output side to suppress the radio interference of the drive.
The reactor at output side can also prevent the over-current caused by inter-cable capacitance when the motor cable is longer than 20m.
10 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Power cable (mm2) Control cable (mm2) Contactor Model
EV3100-
MCCB capacitor
(A) Input/output cable
(copper core)
Control board terminals (300V)
Interface board terminals (600V)
Rated current A (380V/400V)
Max. Coil volt/current (Vac/mA)
Max. close/release
time (ms) 4T0055E 32 4 18 4T0075E 40 6 25 4T0110E 63 6 32 4T0150E 63 6 50 4T0185E 100 10 63 4T0220E 100 16 80 4T0300E 125 25
1 1.0 ~ 2.0
95
250/500 150/120
3.2.2 Basic Connection
The drive wiring includes power circuit wiring and control circuit wiring.
First, open the drive casing (see 3.1.5 for the opening method). You can then see the terminals of power circuit and control circuit. The terminals’ positions vary with different models. See the following for details. The following figures are the basic wiring of different drive models.
PB(+) (-)
TB
TC
TA(Fault relay output)
*TA-TB: closed when normal TA-TC: closed when faulty
Auxiliarypower
DCL DC reactor(Optional)
P1
Brake resistor(Optional)
EV3100
CRACRC
(Contactor control signaloutput)
BRABRC
(Brake control signal output)
Y1
Y2
CM1
Open collector output 1 (bydefault: running)Open collector output 2 (bydefault: zero speed)
Multiple function opencollector output
M
Grounding
U
V
W
PE
KM1 KM2R
S
T
R
S
T
3ph input power380V,50/60Hz
MCCB
Multifunction inputs
FW D
REV
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
UPL
DW LDOW N Leveling
UP Leveling
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
COM
SL (Autolearning)
INS (Inspection)
REQ (Stop Request)
DEC (Distance Control Enable)
MS1
MS2
MS3
X92LS2 (UP forced DEC 1)
X101LS2 (DOW N forced DEC 1)
W D1 (Digital W eigh 1)
X12W D2 (Digital W eigh 2)
X13W D3 (Digital W eigh 3)
X14W D4 (Digital W eigh 4)
ENA (Drive Enable)
Defaults
X110 ~ 10V voltage output 1(by default: running speed)
AO1
GND
AO2
GND
0 ~ 10V voltage output 2 (bydefault: output current)
Analog output
Controlboard
PE485-485+ RXDTXD
RS485communication port
GND
RS232communication port
0 ~ 10V, differential(speed instruction)
AI1
AI2+
AI2-
GND
PE
Analog inputs
0~10V / 0~20mA(W eighing signal)
OA
OB
CM2
Open collector orthogonalsignal outputOrthogonal pulse, randomfrequency division
Frequencydivision output
PG
PGPPGM
A-B+B-
A+
PE
PG interface 1(interface board)
PG interface 2(control board)
1
5
6
10
11
15
15pin PG interface (female)
232
CN17
485 V
CN16
I
Programmablerelay output
Figure 3-8 Basic wiring 1 (EV3100-4T0055E ~ EV3100-4T0220E)
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 11
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Note:
1) You can input voltage or current signal through AI1 by setting the CN16 jumper at control board to V/I position.
2) You can choose to use RS485 or RS232 communication mode by setting the CN17 jumper at control board to 485 or 232 position.
3) The auxiliary power source derives from the positive and negative bus cables (+) and (-).
4) The built-in braking unit requires that braking resistor be connected between (+) and PB.
5) In the above figure, the “O” represents power circuit terminals, while “⊙” represents control terminals.
6) Enclosed by brackets “()” are the default functions of the programmable terminals.
(+) (-)
DCL DC reactor(Optional)
P1
Auxiliarypower
R0
T0
P P
N PB
Brake unit(Optional)
Brake resistor(Optional)
3ph input power:380V, 50/60Hz
R
S
T
R
S
T
MCCB
M
Grounding
U
V
W
PE
KM1 KM2
EV3100Y1
Y2
CM1
Open collector output 1(by default: running)
Open collector output 2(by default: zero speed)
Multiple functionopen collector output
Multifunction inputs
FW D
REV
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
UPL
DW LDOW N Leveling
UP Leveling
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
COM
SL (Autolearning)
INS (Inspection)
REQ (Stop Request)
DEC (Distance Control Enable)
MS1
MS2
MS3
X92LS2 (UP forced DEC 1)
X101LS2 (DOW N forced DEC 1)
W D1 (Digital W eigh 1)
X12W D2 (Digital W eigh 2)
X13W D3 (Digital W eigh 3)
X14W D4 (Digital W eigh 4)
ENA (Drive Enable)
Defaults
X110 ~ 10V voltage output 1(by default: running speed)
AO1
GND
AO2
GND
0 ~ 10V voltage output 2(by default: output current)
Analog output
Controlboard
PE485-485+ RXDTXD
RS485communication port
GND
RS232communication port
0 ~ 10V, differential(speed instruction)
AI1
AI2+
AI2-
GND
PE
Analog inputs
0~10V / 0~20mA(W eighing signal)
OA
OB
CM2
Open collector orthogonalsignal outputOrthogonal pulse, randomfrequency division
Frequencydivision output
PG
PGPPGM
A-B+B-
A+
PE
PG interface 1(interface board)
PG interface 2(control board)
1
5
6
10
11
15
15pin PG interface (female)
232
CN17
485 V
CN16
I
TB
TC
TA(Fault relay output)*TA-TB: closed when normalTA-TC: closed when faulty
CRACRC
(Contactor control signaloutput)
BRABRC
(Brake control signal output) Programmablerelay output
Figure 3-9 Basic wiring 2 (EV3100-4T0300E)
12 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Note:
1) You can input voltage or current signal through AI1 by setting the CN16 jumper at control board to V/I position.
2) You can choose to use RS485 or RS232 communication mode by setting the CN17 jumper at control board to 485 or 232 position.
3. By default, the auxiliary power comes from the R0&T0 that are shorted with the R&T terminals of the 3-phase input. If you want to draw power from external sources, you need to disconnect the shorting bar between R/T and R0/T0 first. Otherwise, shorting may occur.
4. External braking assembly that includes braking unit and braking resistor is needed. Ensure that the polarities are correct when connecting the braking unit.
5) In the above figure, the “O” represents power circuit terminals, while “⊙” represents control terminals.
6) Enclosed by brackets “()” are the default functions of the programmable terminals.
3.2.3 Power Terminal And Earth Terminal
Make sure the drive has been grounded, otherwise electricshock or fire may occur.
Danger!
Do not connect the 3ph AC iuput to the output terminals U, Vor W , or accident may occur.Do not connect brake resistor directly to DC bus (+) and (-)terminals, or fire may occur.
Attention!
Applicable model: EV3100-4T0055E ~ EV3100-4T0150E
R S TPOWER SUPPLY
PB(+) (-) U V W PEP1MOTOR
Applicable model: EV3100-4T0185E ~ EV3100-4T0220E
R S TPOWER SUPPLY
PB(+) (-) U V W PEP1MOTOR
Applicable model: EV3100-4T0300E
R S TPOWER SUPPLY
P1 (+) (-) U V W PEMOTOR
Table 3-2 Terminal definition
Code Function R, S, T 3-phase AC input, 380V, 50Hz/60Hz P1, (+) For external DC reactor (+), PB For external braking resistor (+), (-) For external braking unit
(+) DC positive bus bar output terminal (-) DC negative bus bar output terminal
U, V, W 3-phase output terminal PE Earth terminal
Power input terminals (R, S, T)
The power input terminals R, S and T are connected to the 3-phase AC power through MCCB or ELCB, regardless of the phase sequence. See Table 3-1 for MCCB specifications.
It is recommended to connect electromagnetic contactor at the input side to cut off power upon protection and reduce the damage.
Do not use the single-phase power source.
To reduce the conducted interference to the power source, you can use a noise filter at the input side. See Figure 3-10.
Noise filter
3ph inputpower M
MCCB
Other controlequipment
EV3100 R
S
T
R S T
U
V
W
AC reactor MCCB
Figure 3-10 Noise filter at input side
Drive output terminals (U, V, W)
Connect the drive output terminals U, V and W to the motor terminals U, V and W respectively. If the motor spinning direction is wrong, exchange the connection of any two terminals among U, V and W.
It is prohibited to connect power input to the drive output terminals.
Do not connect capacitor or surge snubber at drive output side.
It is prohibited to short or ground the output circuit.
You can take the following measures to suppress the noise at output side:
1. Use dedicated drive EMI filter at output side. See Figure 3-11.
EMIfilter
3ph inputpower M
Radio setControlequipment
Noise interferrence
EV3100R
S
T
R
S
T
U
V
W
AC reactorMCCB
Figure 3-11 Filter at output side
2. Lead the drive output cables U, V and W through a grounded metal conduit and separate them from signal cables, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 13
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
3ph input power M
Controlequipment
Metal tube
EV3100 R S T
R S T
U V W
AC reactor
Separated layout
MCCB
Figure 3-12 Shielded connection at output side
When the drive-motor cable is long, the inter-cable capacitance may produce large high-frequency current, causing overcurrent trip. Also the increased leakage current might affect current reading precision. Therefore the drive-motor cable should be limited to 100m, otherwise, install filter and reactor at the output side, or decrease drive frequency.
3. DC reactor terminals P1 and (+)
DC reactor can improve power factor. To use DC reactor, you need to remove the shorting bar (default at delivery) between P1 and (+) beforehand.
P1 ( +) ( - )
DC reactor Figure 3-13 DC reactor installation
If the DC reactor is not needed, do not remove the shorting bar, or the drive would be faulty.
P1 ( +) ( - )
Shorting bar Figure 3-14 Circuit without reactor
4) External brake resistor terminals (+) and PB
EV3100 drives of 22kW and below have built-in braking units, and you only need to add a brake resistor if dynamic braking is required. For selection of brake resistor, see Chapter 10.
Wires that connect the brake resistor should be less than 5m long.
The temperature of brake resistor will rise during braking. Ensure safety and good ventilation during installation.
PB(+ ) (-)P1
Brake resistor Figure 3-15 Brake resistor installation
5) External brake unit terminals (+) and (-)
EV3100 30kW drives need external brake unit. You should connect the brake unit between terminals (+) and (-) at the drive, and connect brake resistor between terminals P and PB at the brake unit. For selection of brake unit and resistor, see Chapter 10.
The unit-drive cables should be less than 5m long, and resistor-unit cables should be less than 10m long.
Do not confuse terminal (+) with (-). Do not connect brake resistor directly to (+) and (-), otherwise drive damage or fire accident may occur.
P1 ( +) ( - )
Brake unit
P N
PB
Brake resistor
Drive
Figure 3-16 Wiring of brake resistor/unit (30kW)
6) Earth terminal ( PE)
To avoid electric shock and fire accident, drive PE terminal must be grounded safely, with grounding resistor less than 10 .
It is recommended to use independent earth terminal for each drive. Use thick ( 3.5mm2 or above) and short multi-strand copper-cored cable as the grounding cable. The green-yellow cables are recommended.
In the case of multiple drives, do not use common earth cables, otherwise a closed loop may be created between them.
14 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
3.2.4 Terminals Of Control Board & Interface Board
Control terminals on control board
CN8~CN13Control terminal
CN7Control terminal
Figure 3-17 Control board
1. CN8 ~ CN13 control terminals
1) Control terminal arrangement 485+ 485- PE TXD RXD GND AI1 AI2+ AI2- GND AO1 AO2
2) Control terminal function
Table 3-3 Control board terminal function
Type Terminal Name Function description Spec. 485+ Positive of 485 differential signal
Communication 1 485-
Data communication Negative of 485 differential signal
Standard RS-485 communication port Twisted-pair or shielded cable
TXD Sending terminal of 232 mode RXD Receiving terminal of 232 mode Communication 2 GND
Data communication
Ground of power supply Standard RS-232 communication port
AI1/GND Analog input Use the CN16 V/I jumper on the control board to select between voltage input and current input
Input signal: 0 ~ 10V/0 ~ 20mA Input resistance: 112k /500 Definition: 1/2000 Analog input
AI2+/AI2- Analog input Differential voltage input Input signal: 0 ~ 10V Definition: 1/2000
AO1/GND Analog output 1 Analog output
AO2/GND Analog output 2
Programmable analog output. Ten running states can be selected through F6 function codes.
Output range: 0 ~ 10V voltage signal
Ground of power supply
GND Ground of internal power supply
Reference ground of analog signal and 232 communication
Isolated from COM, CM1 and CM2
Shield PE Ground of shield layer
The shield layer of analog signal cable or communication cable can ground here
Connected with PE internally. Isolated from COM, CM1, CM2 and GND
3) Wiring of analog input terminal
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 15
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Because the analog signal is susceptible to external interference, shielded cables must be used. The cable should be as short as possible, and the shield layer should be grounded properly. See Figure 3-18.
Use shielded cable
Grounding of the shieldingcoat near the drive
EV3100
AI1
GND
0~10V/0~20mA
PE
Figure 3-18 Wiring of analog input terminal
4) Wiring of serial communication port
1) Connection between RS232 port and the host
Terminal description Terminal name
Data sending line TXD
Data receiving line RXD
Power grounding GND
Signal Pin No.
PE Case
RXD 2
TXD 3
GND 5
DTR 4
DSR 6
RI 9
CD 1
RTS 7
CTS 8
Host computerRS232 serial communicationinterface (DB9)
EV3100RS232 communication interface
Shielded cable
485 232CN17
Figure 3-19 Wiring of RS232 communication port
1) Connection between RS485 port and the host
Terminaldescription
Terminalname
Signal -terminal RS485-Signal +terminal RS485+
EV3100RS485 com. port
RS485/RS232converter
Terminalname
Terminaldescription
RS485- Signal -terminal
RS485+ Signal +terminal
Terminaldescription
Terminalname
Positive 5Vpower +5V
Datasending line TXD
Datareceiving line RXD
Grounding of5V power GND
Shieldedcable
485 232CN17
Signal Pin No.
PE Case
RXD 2
TXD 3
GND 5
DTR 4
DSR 6
RI 9
CD 1
RTS 7
CTS 8
Host computerRS232 serialcom. port (DB9)
Figure 3-20 Wiring of RS485 communication port
Note
The PE of each drive should be grounded separately. Use shielded cable that is single-point grounded for the RS485 communication. Connect the ground wire of the shielded cable to the PE of 485 communication module.
2. CN7 PG port on interface board (PG interface 2)
16 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
1) Port pins arrangement
15610
1115
PG 15 Pin (female) 2) CN7 port pins description
Table 3-4 Control terminal function list
Terminal 5V differential UVW SinCos 1 Not used U- C- 2 Not used V- D- 3 A- A- A- 4 B- B- B- 5 Not used W- Not used 6 Not used U+ C+ 7 Not used V+ D+ 8 A+ A+ A+ 9 B+ B+ B+
10 Not used W+ Not used 11 Not used 12 +5V 13 0V 14 Z- Z- Not used 15 Z+ Z+ Not used
3) PG type description
There are 2 PG ports on EV3100 drive: the PGP/PGM/A+/A-/B+/B- terminals (PG port 1) on the interface board and the CN7 port terminal (PG port 2) on the control board.
The PG port on interface board matches only the 12V incremental PG of asynchronous motor. Whereas the PG port on control board matches not only the 5V differential PG of asynchronous motor, but also the UVA and SinCos PG of synchronous motor. You can select the PG type and location of the PG port through function code FA.00, as listed in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 PG type
Value of FA.00 PG type Description Location of PG port0 12V incremental Orthogonal incremental PG (for asynchronous motor) Interface board 1 5V differential 5V differential PG (for asynchronous motor) Control board CN7 2 UVW Orthogonal incremental PG with UVW position signal (for synchronous motor) Control board CN7 3 SinCos SinCos PG without serial communication (for synchronous motor) Control board CN7
Note When using the 12V incremental PG of asynchronous motor, the PG port on control board is invalid. The PG signal should be input through the interface board. See the description of interface board terminals for details. Control terminals on interface board
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 17
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Figure 3-21 Interface board
1) Control terminals arrangement
CRA CRC TA TB TC PLC X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 COM REV PGP PGM A+ A- B+ B-
BRA BRC Y1 Y2 CM1 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 COM X11 X12 X13 X14 UPL CM2 OA OB
FWD
DWL
2) Control terminals function
Table 3-6 Control terminals function
Terminal Function description Spec. X1-COM Multifunctional input 1 (ENA) X2-COM Multifunctional input 2 (SL) X3-COM Multifunctional input 3 (INS) X4-COM Multifunctional input 4 (REQ) X5-COM Multifunctional input 5 (DCE) X6-COM Multifunctional input 6 (MS1) X7-COM Multifunctional input 7 (MS2) X8-COM Multifunctional input 8 (MS3) X9-COM Multifunctional input 9 (2LS2)
X10-COM Multifunctional input 10 (1LS2) X11-COM Multifunctional input 11 (WD1) X12-COM Multifunctional input 12 (WD2) X13-COM Multifunctional input 13 (WD3)
X14-COM Multifunctional input 14 (WD4)
Contactor input. The input signal is valid when the contactor is closed The corresponding functions are selected through F5.00 ~ F5.13. See section 6.6 for function description. See the following table for the spec. of the contactor input circuit:
voltage 24Vdc±20% Input filtering time <20ms Response range 0 ~ 0.05kHz
0V
24V
X1,X2,X3, ...
COM
Contactorinput
⊙
⊙
FWD-COM
Input terminal for forward command. When this signal is valid, the elevator goes up. If the actual running command is reverse, you can adjust by exchanging the connection of any two of U, V and W terminals on the motor.
REV-COM
Input terminal for reverse command. When this signal is valid, the elevator goes down. If the actual running command is forward, you can adjust by exchanging the connection of any two of U, V and W terminals on the motor.
UPL-COM Input terminal for up leveling signal. When this signal is valid, the elevator locates at “up leveling position”. You can select the normally open or closed input through F7.02.
DWL-COM Input terminal for down leveling signal. When this signal is valid, the elevator locates at “down leveling position”. You can select the normally open or closed input through F7.02.
Contactor input (same as X1-COM)
18 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Terminal Function description Spec.
Y1-CM1 Open-collector output 1 (In running state)
Y2-CM1 Open-collector output 2 (Zero speed signal)
The corresponding functions are selected through F5.30 and F5.31, the action mode, through F5.35. See section 6.6 for function description. Listed below is the spec. of the contactor output circuit: Max: 100mA. Output resistance: 30 ~ 35
R1
+5V
Y1、Y2
CM1
OA-CM2
OB-CM2
Frequency-dividing signal output
Open collector orthogonal signal output. Max response speed: 120kHz. The frequency-dividing factor can be set through F7.03. Listed below is the spec. of the contactor output circuit: Max: 100mA. Output resistance: 30 ~ 35
OA、OB
CM2
R1
+5V
+12V
CRA-CRC Programmable relay output (running-contactor control output)
Normally open contact output. See the following table for the spec. of relay contact.
Item Note Rated capacity 250Vac/3A, 30Vdc/1A Min. capacity 10mA Electrical life 100,000 times Mechanical life 10,000,000 times Action time <15ms
BRA-BRC Programmable relay output (brake control output)
Normally open contact output, with spec. same as that of CRA-CRC
TA-TB Programmable relay output (fault normally closed output) Normally closed contact output, with spec. same as that of CRA-CRC
TA-TC Programmable relay output (fault normally open output) Normally open contact output, with spec. same as that of CRA-CRC
PGP-PGM PG power source Voltage: 12V. Max. output current: 250mA A+, A- PG phase A signal B+, B- PG phase B signal
Max. input frequency: 30kHz
PE Ground of shield layer Ground terminal of shielded cable, internally connected to PE of power circuit
COM Common terminal of contactor input, used with other terminals
Internally isolated from PE, PGM, CM1, CM2 and GND
PLC Input terminal of external power source Voltage class: 24Vdc ~ 30Vdc COM cannot be used when PLC is used as the power input terminal
Note: In the column of “Function description”, the items marked with the bracket “()”are factory defaults.
3) Wire connection of control terminals
Multi-conductor shielded cable or twisted wire (see Table 3-1 for the cable spec.) should be used to connect the control terminal. When shielded cable is used, the shielding layer should be connected to the drive PE, at the end close to the drive. The wiring of the control cable should be more than 20cm away from the power cables such as the power supply cable, motor
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 19
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
cable, relay wire and contactor wire. Parallel laying of them should be avoided. If possible, arrange the control cable and power cable orthogonal to each other to avoid misoperation of the drive due to electromagnetic interference.
4) Wire connection of customer power source
The contactor input terminal can use the drive-provided 24V power, or the customer-provided external power. See the following figures for the wiring.
Internal power +24V
X1, X2 . . . X14FW D, REV, etc.
Inside the drive
+5V
COM
Internal power +24V
X1, X2 . . . X14FW D, REV, etc.
User's power8V~24V
Inside the drive
+5V
PLC
(a) Using drive's internal 24V power (b) Using user's power
PLC
Figure 3-22 Wiring of contactor input terminal
Note When the customer power source PLC terminal is used, the COM terminal cannot be used at the same time. 5) Wire connection of open collector output terminal
The open collector output terminal can be applied to both internal power and external power .See Figure 3-23.
Ry
External power (5 ~ 30V)
Grounding ofexternal power
(b) Wiring for external powering
Y1
CM1
EV3100
Ry
(a) Wiring for internal powering
PGP
Y1
EV3100
CM1 PGM
Figure 3-23 Wire connection of frequency-division signal output terminal
6) Wire connection of frequency division signal output terminal
The frequency division signal OA and OB are open collector orthogonal signal that can be applied to both internal power and external power. See Figure 3-24.
Ry
External power (5 ~ 30V)
Grounding ofexternal power
(b) Wiring for external powering
CM2
EV3100
Ry
(a) Wiring for internal powering
PGPEV3100
CM2 PGM
OA/OBOA/OB
Figure 3-24 Wire connection of frequency division signal output terminal
7 Wire connection of relay terminals
Use the cables recommended in Table 3-1 to connect the relay output terminals and control contactors. If the relay output is used to drive inductive loads (such as contact relay or contactor), the surge voltage snubbing circuit should be mounted, such as the RC snubbing circuit (with leakage current smaller than the contactor or relay current), the piezoresistor or diode (for DC electromagnetic circuit, polarity sensitive). The surge snubbing circuit should be mounted parallel to the relay or contactor coil, as shown in Figure 3-25.
20 Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
(a) RC snubber circuit (b) DC snubber circuit
R:100~500ΩC:0.1~0.2uF
Coil of contactor/relay Coil of contactor/relay
220Vac + Vdc -
Relay terminal Relay terminal
Figure 3-25 Surge snubbing circuit
8 Wire connection of PG
The PG signal cable must be laid away from the power circuits. Parallel wiring within short distance is prohibited. Use shielded cable as the PG signal cable. The shielding layer should be connected to the PE terminal, at the end near the drive.
Example of PG connection
1. When PG outputs open collector signal, the connection of PG to interface board is shown in Figure 3-26:
EV3100 interface board
A
VCC
0 V
A
B
Use shielded cable
Grounding of theshielding coat
PG open collector
0V
0V
+5VPGP
PE
PGM
A+
A-
B-
B+ B
Interface circuit,the same as A
VCC
VCC
(with dotted lineenclosed parts, it isvoltage type output PG)
Figure 3-26 Connecting PG (open-collector signal output) to interface board
2. When PG outputs push-pull signal, the connection of PG to interface board is shown in Figure 3-27:
EV3100 interface board
0 V
A
Push-pulloutput PG
B
Use shielded cable
Grounding of theshielding coat
+5VPGP
PE
PGM
A+
A-
B-
B+
A
BInterface circuit,the same as A
VCCVCC
GND
VCC
GND
Figure 3-27 Connecting PG (push-pull signal output) to interface board
Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring 21
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Jumper on control board
To ensure drive normal operation, the jumpers CN16 and CN17 on control board should be set correctly. See Figure 3-28 for the jumper position.
CN1
CN
6
DSP
CPLD
CN8 CN9 CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13CN7
Keypadsocket
CN4
CN2
232
CN17
485 V
CN16
I
Figure 3-28 Jumper position on control board
See Table 3-7 for the setting of jumpers on control board.
Table 3-7 Function and setting of control-board jumpers
Serial No. Function Setting Defaults
CN16 Current/voltage input mode selection for analog input AI1 I: 0 ~ 20mA current signal V: 0 ~ 10V voltage signal
Voltage mode
CN17 Communication mode RS232 and RS485 selection 232: RS232 communication mode 485: RS485 communication mode
RS485
Installation meeting EMC requirements
The drive noise is unavoidable, which entails the EMC problem. To reduce the drive’s interference on the environment, refer to Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance when wiring.
22 Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
Introduction: This chapter will equip you with the basic knowledge for the drive commissioning, including the use of keypad and setting of functional codes. For detailed function code description, see Chapter 5 and Chapter 6. Beginning with the introduction of general terms and basic knowledge of drives, this chapter introduces keypad operation and parameter setting methods. Also the drive commissioning procedures and notes are introduced.
4.1 Drive Terms
This chapter introduces drive basic operations, which is classified into 4 kinds: operation modes, control modes, running modes and work states. Please read this chapter carefully to get a better understanding of the drive.
4.1.1 Operation Mode
Operation mode here refers to the mode in which the drive receives the running command (start & stop) and speed instruction. There are 6 operation modes, set through function code F0.02 (see Chapter 5 for details).
1. Keypad control: The RUN/STOP key on keypad controls the drive start/stop. The speed is set through F0.03.
2. Analog terminal control: Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. Terminal AI1/AI2 gives the speed instruction.
3. Terminal speed control: Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. Terminals MS1 ~ MS3 in combination gives the running speed.
4. Terminal distance control: Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. The FLE and F1 ~ F6 in combination determines the destination floor. The drive can calculate the speed based on distance control principle.
5. Host speed control: The host gives the running command and sets the speed through communication.
6. Host distance control: The host gives the running command. The host determines the destination floor through communication. The drive can calculate the speed based on distance control principle.
4.1.2 Control Mode
According to the motor type and whether there is PG feedback, drive control modes are classified into 4 kinds that are set through F1.01. The 4 control modes are:
1. Asynchronous open-loop vector control: sensorless vector control for asynchronous motors. It is suitable for
low-speed elevators that do not require high precision control, or when PG is not needed.
2. Asynchronous close-loop vector control 1: vector control with sensor, for asynchronous motors. It requires identifying motor parameters.
3. Asynchronous close-loop vector control 2: vector control with sensor, for asynchronous motors. This control mode does not require identifying motor parameters. But it requires correct input of F1.08 (motor power factor).
4. Synchronous close-loop vector control: vector control with sensor, for synchronous motors. This mode requires UVW incremental PG or SINCOS PG (selected through FA.00) and identifying parameters.
4.1.3 Running Mode
Running mode refers to the drive operation state after receiving running command and speed instruction in certain preset control mode.
There are 7 running modes:
1. Auto-tune running: Set F1.10 to 1 to enable the auto-tuning, set F1.11 to 1/2, and press RUN key to enter the auto-tune running mode.
2. Normal running: Set F0.02 to 0 (keypad control) or to 1 (analog speed control) to enter the normal running mode.
3. Multi-Speed (MS) running: when the running speed is set by MS1 ~ MS3 in combination. This mode is accessible when F0.02 is set to 2, 3, 4 or 5.
4. Distance control running: when the running speed is calculated by the drive automatically according to the distance. This mode is accessible when F0.02 is set to 2, 3, 4 or 5.
5. Inspection running: when INS signal is valid, and the speed is determined by F3.20 (inspection running speed). This mode is accessible when F0.02 is set to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
6. Auto-learn running: when SL signal is valid, and the running speed is determined by F3.17 (Autolearning Speed). This mode is accessible when F0.02 is set to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
7. Battery-driven running: when BAT signal is valid, and the speed is determined by F3.18 (emergency speed). This mode is accessible when F0.02 is set to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Note Only one of the above 7 modes can be selected at one time. The LCD on the keypad will display the corresponding mode name when a certain mode is entered.
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 23
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
4.1.4 Work State
When powered, the drive has 5 work states, namely standby, programming, operating, fault alarm and P.OFF, as detailed below:
Standby state
The drive is in standby state after it is re-powered or slowed to stop and before it is given any operation command. In this state, the State indicator is off, the LED/LCD by default displays the elevator rated speed (adjustable through F9.02). You can also view other parameters by pressing the key (what parameters will be displayed are determined by F9.02). LED display mode is blink display.
Programming state
Through the MENU/ESC key or the Function Code of the host software, the drive can enter the programming state in which function codes can be viewed or changed.
In this state the function codes and parameters can be displayed. LED display mode is digit-blink display.
Running state
The drive will enter the running state after receiving an operation command. In this state, the State indicator will be
on. By pressing the key, LED/LCD can cyclically display parameters determined by F9.00 and F9.01. LED display mode is non-blink display.
Fault alarm state
The drive enters the fault alarm state when it is faulty and displays the fault code.
The LED blinks to display the fault code. Except the fault detected in real-time, all faults can be reset through: A, the STOP/RESET key; B, control terminal; C, remote resetting command.
In fault alarm state, you can quit the error code display by using the MENU/ESC button (except for power off error), but the drive is still in fault alarm state.
P.OFF State
When the drive is running or in standby state, LED may display P.OFF (non-blinking) sometimes. The possible causes of the P.OFF (undervoltage) fault include:
1. Undervoltage of DC bus
2. Undervoltage of control power supply
3. System power off
In the P.OFF state, the keypad is locked to avoid misoperation.
4.2 Keypad Operation
The keypad (or operation panel) is a standard component in EV3100 drive. You can configure parameters, monitor, start and stop the drive through the keypad. Please read this chapter carefully before using EV3100 drive.
4.2.1 Keypad Introduction
The keypad area of EV3100 drive contains LED, LCD, keys and indicators, as shown in Figure 4-1.
ENTERDATA
RUN
JOG
UNITHZ
r/min
A
V
m/s
%
PARAMETER
PANEL CTRLElevator Rated SpeedLCD display
(displaying state, parameterdescription and prompts)
Program/exit
Running state indicator
Arrow keys
Unit indicators
Direction pointer
Save key
Instruction direction indicator
Forward/Reverse key
Jog key
Stop/Reset keyRun key
STOPRESET
MENUESC
Scroll key
FWDREV
LED display(displaying runningspeed, outputvoltage, output, current, present
floor, present position, etc.)
Figure 4-1 Keypad and display
24 Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
4.2.2 Key Description
Table 4-1 Keypad description
Key Name Function ESC
MENU
Menu/Esc 1. Shift between Stop/Running state and Menu state. 2. In menu operation, return to the last menu
DATAENTER
Save key 1. Save the change of parameters. 2. In menu operation, enter submenu
Up arrow Increase the function code, function group or parameter
Down arrow Decrease the function code, function group or parameter
Scroll key 1. View LED display during standby/running state. 2. Select the digit to be changed during setup. The selected digit blinks
RUN RUN key 1. Start the drive in keypad control mode. 2. Start the auto-tuning STOP
RESET Stop/Reset key 1. Stop the drive in keypad control mode. 2. Stop tuning. 3. Reset the fault alarm state (in any control mode)
JOG JOG key Reserved FWDREV Forward/Reverse key Reserved
Note For EV3100 drive, keys FWD/REV and JOG are invalid. The STOP/Reset key’s stop function is valid only in the auto-tuning process and keypad-controlled normal operation. However, when the drive is faulty or stops in any operation mode, you can reset the fault with STOP/RESET key.
4.2.3 Indicator Description
There are 5 indicators on the keypad, 3 of which are unit indicators. Corresponding to different drive states, the indicators may be ON, OFF or BLINK. See Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Indicator description
Display in different states Indicator
Forward Reverse Stop Fault Remark State indicator ON Off Off ON during tuning process Direction command indicator
ON OFF BLINK BLINK
Unit indicator 3 LEDs in combination indicates the unit of displayed figures
OFF
LED Display drive value Fault code
LCD First line: control mode. Second line: alternatively display names of LED parameters and operation instruction
Fault descriptionSpinning arrow on LCD screen suggests running direction. Clockwise rotation: FWD. Counter clockwise: REV.
State indicator: Located above the RUN key, its states include ON and OFF. This indicator indicates drive running states in all control modes. ON indicates EV3100 drive is in running or auto-tuning state.
Direction command indicator: Located above the FWD/REV key, its states include ON, OFF and BLINK. It blinks when the drive stops and the direction command is uncertain. When the drive is in running state, this indicator is ON when the drive receives FWD command, and OFF when the drive receives REV command.
Unit indicator: comprising 3 indicators, located to the right of LED. Through combination they can indicate 6 units for the parameters in LED. The explanation of the combinations is shown in Figure 4-2.
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 25
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
r/min
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
Hz
r/min
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
A
r/min
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
No unit
On Off
%
r/min
A
V
Hz
UNIT
V
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
r/min
r/min
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
m/s
r/min
m/s%A
V
Hz
UNIT
%
r/min
m/s
Figure 4-2 Unit indicators combination
Note: % suggests that the value displayed by LED is a percent.
4.2.4 Keypad Display In Various Modes
Initialization at power-on
The keypad goes through a 5-second initialization process after power on. At first, the LCD will display ENYDRIVE, and then EV3100 ENYDRIVE. The LED will display ‘8.8.8.8.’, while all indicators will keep ON all along. See Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Power-on initialization
In the initialization process, if LED does not display ‘8.8.8.8.’, or LCD keeps displaying ENYDRIVE, the keypad socket may have bad contact with the main control board so that the communication have failed.
Standby state
In the standby state, the appearance of the keypad is shown in Figure 4-4. The LED will blink to display the parameter, while the unit indicators indicate its unit.
The upper left of the LCD displays the drive’s present control mode (keypad/terminal/communication control, determined by F0.02), while the upper right is the Standby
icon. The lower row of the LCD shifts regularly between the description of LED figure (for example, in Figure 4-4, Elevator Rated Speed) and the operation instruction (for example, M/E: Menu Mode, meaning you can enter the menu mode by pressing the ESC
MENU key).
In Standby state, the Direction indicator blinks, while the
State indicator is OFF. You may press the key to view other parameters.
In the Standby state you can enter the menu mode by pressing the ESC
MENU key to check or change parameters.
Figure 4-4 Standby state keypad
Running state
After receiving a correct operation command, a standby EV3100 drive will enter the Running state, as shown in Figure 4-5.
The LED will display the parameter, while the unit indicators indicate its unit.
The upper left of the LCD will display the drive’s running state (normal running, inspection running, multi-speed running and so on). The upper right of the LCD is a spinning
26 Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
arrow, spinning clockwise when drive direction is FWD, while counter clockwise when REV. The lower row of the LCD shifts regularly between the description of LED figure (for example, in Figure 4-5, Present Floor) and the operation instruction.
In the running state, the State indicator keeps on, while the Running Command Indicator represents the direction of the elevator: ON for UPWARD and OFF for DOWNWARD.
In the Running state you can enter the menu mode by pressing the ESC
MENU key to check or change parameters.
Figure 4-5 Running state keypad
Fault alarm state
EV3100 drives are designed with complete fault detection and protection functions to ensure personal safety and normal operation of elevators. In all states, when the drive detects an abnormality, it will report the fault immediately, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Fault-alarm state keypad
In this state, the LED blinks to show the fault code, while LCD displays the fault message.
In the fault alarm state, you can press the ESCMENU key to enter
the menu mode (except when in the E023 keypad read/write fault state).
In the Fault Alarm state, you can reset the fault by pressing the RESET
STOP key. If the fault has been cleared, the drive will return to the Standby state. Otherwise, the drive will continue to display the fault code.
4.3 Keypad Operation Process
4.3.1 Keypad Operation
The menu system has 3 levels, which are: Function group, function code and function code value.
There are 12 function groups: F0 ~ F9, FA and FE. Each function group includes several function codes. For example, F0.05 refers to the function encoded 05 in F0 function group.
You can set the value of every function code. You need to use the key or key to switch between function group and function code and set function code value. For example, if you want to switch F0 to F1, press key once. You also need the key to set the function code value. For example, to change the value 011.5 to 001.5, you need to press the key twice.
See Figure 4-7 for the switch over among 3-level menus.
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 27
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
PANEL CTRL
BASICPARAMETER
Level 2 menu
1.500
F0ENCODERFUNCTION
FA
UserPassword
F0.00
MENUESC
ENTERDATA
0~9999
0000
Para. Display
F0.10
ENTERDATA
MENUESC
0~9999
9999
Stop/Run state
⋯⋯
Level 1 menu Select function group
ten times
ten times
Select function code
Set function codesLevel 3 menu
ten times
ten times
MENUESC
ENTER
DATA
Elevator Rated Speed
Figure 4-7 Three-level menu
In every menu level, the LCD will display, in addition to the LED description, the corresponding operation instruction. In level 2 menus, the LCD will also display the read/write property of the function code at its bottom right, with marks as explained below:
R/W: readable and changeable in the level 3 menu.
R/W: readable only.
: under the protection of user password.
The read/write property of function codes changes in different situations (running/stop). See Chapter 5 for details.
In level 3 menu, you can press the ESCMENU key or DATA
ENTER key to return to the level 2 menu. The difference here is that DATA
ENTER key will save the parameter and return to level 2 menu, adding one to the function code, while ESC
MENU key enters level 2 menu directly without saving parameter and adding to the function code number.
Note In level 3 menus, due to the limit of LCD space, it is stipulated that: 1. For parameters that may have 5-digit values, such as F4.08 and F4.09, only the 4 highest digits will be displayed. A decimal point will be used to indicate “ 10”. For example, parameter value 23512 will be displayed as ‘2351.’. 2. For function codes that display terminal group states, such as F9.12, F9.13 and F9.14, the parameter value will be displayed in hexadecimal. For example, parameter value 95 is displayed as 5F.
4.3.2 Parameter Configuration
To exemplify the parameter setting through EV3100 drive keypad, this section will explain how to set the parameter of a traction machine from 11.5kW to 7.5kW.
As shown in Figure 4-8, you can select digits by pressing the key. When the parameter configuration is completed, press the ESC
MENU key twice to return to the STANDBY/RUNNING state.
0.4~999.9KW
001.5
0.4~999.9KW
007.5
Rated Voltage
F1.03
six times
ENTERDATA
0.4~999.9KW
011. 5
0.4~999.9KW
011.5
0.4~999.9KW
001.5
twice
MENUESC
BASICPARAMETER
F0
PG Pulse
F1.00
ENTERDATA
MOTORPARAMETER
F1
twice
Rated Power
F1.02
ENTERDATA
PANEL CTRL
1.500Stop/run state
PANEL CTRL
1.500
Elevator Rated Speed
MENUESC
twice
Elevator Rated Speed
Figure 4-8 Parameter configuration
4.3.3 Parameters Displayed By LED
To ease the commissioning, the LED will display the relevant parameters (determined by F9.00 ~ F9.02) in standby/running state. You can press to view other parameters.
Parameters displayed in standby state
In standby state, 15 parameters can be displayed (see F9.02 in Chapter 6). The default display at power on is Elevator Rated Speed.
Figure 4-9 (a) shows the procedures to change the default display into “Dec Distance”. Figure 4-9 (b) shows how to view 15 state parameters in the standby state by pressing the key.
Dec.Distance:2.73m
Dec. Distance
8
ElevatorRated Speed
00
Present Floor
F9.03
PANEL CTRLDec Distance
2.73
ENTER
DATA
eight times
ENTERDATA
MENUESC
twice
MENUESC
BASICPARAMETER
F0
Monitor Para. 1
F9.00
ENTERDATA
STATUSMONITOR
F9
twice
threetimes
(a)
Monitor Para. 3
F9.0 2
(b)
PANEL CTRLDec Distance
2.73
PANEL CTRLStart Torque Boost
0
⋯⋯
PANEL CTRLDec Distance
2.73
PANEL CTRL
Elevator Rated Speed
1.500
Figure 4-9 Parameters displayed in standby state
Parameter displayed in running state
In the running state, at most 18 parameters (determined by F9.00 and F9.01, see Chapter 6 for details) can be cyclically checked through the LED.
28 Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Parameters displayed by default
The default LED-displayed parameter is determined by the lowest ‘1’ bit in the F9.00 binary code. If F9.00 is 0, the default is then determined by the lowest ‘1’ bit in the F9.01 binary code. See the description F9.00 and F9.01 in Chapter 6.
4.3.4 Parameter Copying
The copy function enables you to batch copy and save drive parameters (protected against power failure). There are 2 copy modes: upload and download.
Parameter upload: uploading the parameters F0.00 ~ FA.07 (except F9.04 ~ F9.21) from control board memory to the keypad E2PROM.
Parameter download: downloading the parameters F0.00 ~ FA.07 (except F9.04 ~ F9.21) from keypad E2PROM to the control board memory.
Note 1. The copy function is available between drives of EV3100 series only. 2. To ensure data consistency and integrity, during parameter upload/download, the keypad will be locked and the process cannot be terminated, or the drive will report E023 (keypad read/write fault). 3. The parameters can be up/downloaded only in keypad control mode (F0.02 = 0) in standby state. 4. After the download, the user password (if already set) will be changed accordingly. See Figure 4-10 for the parameter copy procedures. Specifically, part (a) is the parameter upload, and part (b) is the download. During the copying process, LCD will show the progress.
a) Parameter upload b) Parameter download
twice
No Operation
0
Copy Parameterto Mainboard
2
Copy Parameter toMainboard
30%
CoPy
Para. Display
F0.1 0
ENT ER
DAT A
once
ENT ER
DAT A
No Operation
0
MENU
ESC
PANEL CTRLElevator Rated Speed
1.500
BASICPARAMETER
F0
Para. Update 2
F0.0 9
ENT ER
DAT A
User Password
F0.00
Copy ParameterTo Panel
1
Copy Parameter ToPanel
30%
Г
Para. Display
F0.10
ENT ER
DAT A
MENU
ESC
PANEL CTRLElevator Rated Speed
1.500
BASICPARAMETER
F0
Para. Update 2
F0.0 9
ENT ER
DAT A
User Password
F0.0 0
ENT ER
DAT A
EAd
nine times
nine times
Figure 4-10 Parameter copy procedures
4.3.5 User Password
You can set password through F0.00. By default, F0.00 is set to 0000, i.e., no password.
Figure 4-11 (a) shows how to set the password to 1111, and Figure 4-11 (b) shows how to cancel a password.
(a)
M ENU
ESC
PANEL CTRLElevator Rated Speed
1.500
BASICPARAMETER
F 0
Change the value to 1111
ENTER
DATA
M ENU
ESC
F0.0 0
1111
UserPassword
F0.00
ENTER
DATA
0000~9999
0000
PANEL CTRLElevator Rated Speed
1.500
ENTER
DATA
twice
0000~9999
LCD prompt:PASSW ORD SETUP OK
(b)
Set the value to 1111
User Password
F0.00
ENTER
DATA
User Password
F0.00
ENTER
DATA
0000
1111
Language Select
F0.01
0000
Language Select
F0.01
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
DATA
0000~9999
0000~9999
0000~9999
LCD prompt:PASSWORD CLEAR
LCD prompt:PASSWORD CORRECT
User Password
Figure 4-11 Password operation procedures
After the password is activated, the level 2 menus will show at bottom right of the keypad LCD. All parameters
become read only then. To change the parameters, you need to enter the correct password through F0.00. If the password is correct, the will disappear, and the parameters will become changeable. Otherwise, the will remain. After inputting the correct password, if no key is pressed within 3 minutes, the password will be activated again. You need to input the correct password again to change the parameters.
If you want to cancel the password, you need to enter the correct password first, then set the password to 0.
4.3.6 Parameter Tuning
The drive is high-precision vector controlled. Except when the asynchronous close-loop mode 2 is selected (F1.01 = 2), you need to conduct parameter tuning to obtain motor parameters.
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 29
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Only when F1.10 is set to 1 (auto-tuning enabled) can you use F1.11 (motor auto-tuning) to carry out motor auto-tuning.
See Figure 4-12 for the operation procedures of asynchronous motor tuning. Motor rated power: 7.5kW. Rated voltage: 380V. Rated current: 15.4A. Rated frequency: 50.00Hz. Rated speed: 1440r/min.
See Figure 4-13 for the operation procedures of synchronous motor tuning. Motor rated power: 7.5kW. Rated voltage: 380V. Rated current: 15.4A. Rated frequency: 50.00Hz. Rated speed: 1440r/min. A SinCos PG that generates 6,000 pulses for each round is used.
F1.01Control Mode
ENTERDATA
1ASYN. FVC 1
F1.02
Rated Power
011.0
0.4~999.9KW
007.5
0.4~999.9KW
F1.03
Rated Voltage
380
1~999 V
F1.04
Rated Current
25
0.1~999.9A
15.4
0.1~999.9A
F1.05
Rated Frequency
50.00
1.00~99.99Hz
F1.10
Autotuning Mask
F1.06
Rated Speed
1440
1~9999r/min
F1.07
Mechanical Para.
0F1.11 Disabled
1
F1.11 Enabled
F1.11
Autotuning
0No Action
F1.11AutotuneSuccess
1
Start Autotune
F1.11
AUTOTUNE?
0AUTOTUNING⋯,
Output Voltage
RUN
threetimes
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
Figure 4-12 Asynchronous motor tuning procedures
F1.02额定功率
011.00.4~999.9KW
007.50.4~999.9KW
F1.03额定电压
250.1~999.9A
15.40.1~999.9A
F1.05额定频 率
50.001.00~99.99Hz
F1.06额定转速
1440
1~9999r/min
F1.07曳引机参数
0禁 止调谐
1允 许调谐
F1.11自 动调谐进 行
0无操作
自 动调谐结 束
1启 动调谐
F1.11进 行 调谐?
0正在 调谐…输出电压
RUN
F1.01控 制 方式
3同步闭 环矢量
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
380
1~999 V
ENTERDATA
F1.04额定电流
ENTERDATA
F1.10自 动调谐保护
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
F1.00PG脉冲数
Rated Power
0.4~999.9KW
0.4~999.9KW
Rated Voltage
0.1~999.9A
0.1~999.9A
RatedFrequency
1.00~99.99Hz
Rated Speed
1~9999r/min
MechanicalPara.
F1.11 Disabled
F1.11 Enabled
Autotuning
No Action
F1.11AutotuneSuccess
Start Autotune
AUTOTUNE?
AUTOTUNING⋯,Output Voltage
RUN
threetimes
Control Mode
SYN. FVC
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
1~999 V
ENTERDATA
Rated Current
ENTERDATA
Autotuning Mask
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
ENTERDATA
Set FunctionCode
PG Pulse
60001~9999
ENTERDATA
FA.00编码器 类型
3SINCOS式
Set FunctionCode
Set FunctionCode
ENTERDATA
PG Type
SINCOS
Figure 4-13 Synchronous motor tuning procedures
Note 1. The auto-tuning can be conducted only in keypad control mode (F0.02 = 0) in standby state. 2. During the auto-tuning process, you can check different parameters by pressing the key. If any abnormality occurs during the tuning process, you can press the STOP/RESET key to stop, and the motor parameters that have been obtained are invalid. 3. If macro tuning is selected, LCD will display Macro Tuning. At level 2 menus, the keypad will respond to MENU/ESC and ENTER/DATA only.
30 Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
4.4 Getting Started
Make sure the power is off before the wiring, otherwise electricshock or fire may occur.To ensure safety, The wiring should be done by professionalsThe safety circuit connection should be double checked toensure safety.Make sure to ground drive's PE terminal, otherwise electricshock or fire may occur.
Danger!
Do not connect AC power input to any output terminal U/V/W , oraccident will occur.Do not connect the DC terminal (+)/(-) directly with brakeresistor, or fire may occur.
AC power voltage must meet drive's rated voltage, otherwiselife injury or fire may occur.
Do not conduct dielectric strength test on the drive, or damagemay occur.
Attention!
4.4.1 Power On Inspection
1. When the system is ready, check the drive for abnormal noise, smoke and smell. The power should be cut off in case of abnormality.
2. Check the keypad display several seconds after the power on. Compare that with the description in section 4.2.4.
4.4.2 Running Check
During system operation, check the following:
Motor runs smoothly.
Motor spins in the right direction
Motor spins without abnormal vibration or noise
Acc/Dec smoothly
Drive output and keypad display are correct
4.4.3 Basic Operations
The following is an example with asynchronous motor to introduce basic operation of the drive.
Keypad controlled speed setting, start and stop operations
1. See Figure 4-14 for the basic wiring.
EV3100
COM
FWD
COM
Maincontrolboard
UVWPE
M
.
..
.
INS
REV .
3ph ACpower
MCCB
TS
R
Figure 4-14 Wiring for keypad controlled operation
2. Basic procedures
1) Power-on after wiring.
2) Press MENU/ESC to enter menu system.
3) Set F1.01 (control mode) to 0.
4) Set F1.02 ~ F1.06 according to motor nameplate parameters.
5) Set F1.10 (auto-tuning protection) to 1.
6) Set F1.11 (Motor Auto-tuning) to 1.
7) Auto-tune motor parameters (see section 4.3.6).
8) Set F0.03 (Elevator Speed) to 1.000m/s.
9) Press MENU/ESC twice to return to standby state.
10) Press RUN to start.
11) Press STOP to Dec to stop.
12) Cut off power.
Speed setting, start and stop operations by using the inspection terminal
1. See Figure 4-15 for the basic wiring.
EV3100
COM
FWD
COM
Maincontrolboard
UVWPE
M
.
.
.
.
INS
REV.
3ph ACpower
MCCB
TS
R
K3 K1
K2
Figure 4-15 Wiring for INS terminal controlled operation
Chapter 4 Drive Operation And Commissioning 31
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
2. Basic procedures
1) Power-on after wiring.
2) Press MENU/ESC to enter menu system.
3) Set the following parameters:
F0.02 = 2 (terminal speed control)
F1.01 = 0 (open loop vector control)
F3.20 = 0.400m/s (inspection running speed)
4) Press MENU/ESC to return to the standby state.
5) Close the switch K3 between INS and COM.
6) Set motor rotation direction with K1 and K2 (K1 closed, FWD. K2 closed, REV). Motor starts running as required.
7) Switch off K3, drive decelerates to stop.
8) At zero speed, switch off K1 or K2.
9) Cut off power.
32 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
Overview: This chapter details all function codes of the drive for your reference.
5.1 Conventions
1. The FX.XX in this manual means function code No. XX in function group X, e.g., F1.01 means function code 01 in function group 1.
2. Symbols in the column Modifiable:
‘;’: The parameter can be modified during running.
‘ ’: The parameter cannot be modified during running.
‘*’: The parameter value is fixed or detected in operation. It cannot be change.
‘-’: The parameter is manufacturer reserved, not user changeable.
3. Function codes are classified into groups. To find a function code, you need to determine which group it belongs first, then consult the function code table.
4. Speed settings of function codes should be smaller than or equal to the rated speed.
5.2 Function Codes
5.2.1 Function Groups
The function groups are listed below:
MENU ESC
Basic parametersF0
Traction machineparametersF1
Vector controlfunctionF2
Speed curveF3
Distance controlparameterF4
Digital terminalF5
Analog terminalF6
EnhancedfunctionF7
CommunicationparameterF8
State monitorfunctionF9
PG functionFA
ReservedFE
5.2.2 Table Of Function Codes
F0: Basic Parameters
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default ModifiableUser
settingF0.00 User Password User Password 0 ~ 9999 1 0 ;
F0.01 Language Select Language Select 0: Chinese 1: English
1 0 ;
F0.02 Operation Mode Operation Mode
0: Keypad control 1: Terminal analog control 2: Terminal speed control 3: Terminal distance control 4: Host-computer speed control 5: Host-computer distance control
1 0 ×
F0.03 Speed Digital Setup Speed Digital Setup 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ;
F0.04 Run Direction Run Direction 0: FWD 1: REV
1 0 ×
F0.05 Elevator Rated Speed
Elevator Rated Speed 0.100 ~ 4.000m/s 0.001m/s 1.500m/s ×
F0.06 Max. Output Frequency
MAX Output Freq. 1.00 ~ 99.99Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes 33
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default ModifiableUser
settingF0.07 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq. 5 ~ 16kHz 1kHz 8kHz ×
F0.08 Parameter Update 1 Para. Update 1 0: no operation 1: clear memory 2: restore defaults
1 0 ×
F0.09 Parameter Update 2 Para. Update 2 0: no operation 1: upload data to keypad 2: download data to control board
1 0 ×
F0.10 Parameter Display Para. Display 0: display all 1: display changed parameters
1 0 ×
F1: Traction Parameters
Cla
ss
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
settingF1.00 Number of PG Pulses PG Pulse 1 ~ 9999 1 1024 ×
F1.01 Control Mode Control Mode
0: Asynchronous open loop vector control 1: Asynchronous close loop vector control 1 2: Asynchronous close loop vector control 2 3: Synchronous close loop vector control
1 1 ×
F1.02 Motor Rated Power Rated Power 0.4 ~ 999.9kW 0.1kW Drive rating
×
F1.03 Motor Rated Voltage Rated Voltage 1 ~ 999V 1V Drive rating
×
F1.04 Motor Rated Current Rated Current 0.1 ~ 999.9A 0.1A Drive rating
×
F1.05 Motor Rated Frequency
Rated Frequency
1.00 ~ 99.99Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
F1.06 Motor Rated Speed Rated Speed 1 ~ 9999r/min 1r/min 1440 r/min ×
F1.07 Traction Machine Mechanical Parameters
Mechanical Para.
10.0 ~ 6000 0.1 60.0 ×
F1.08 Motor Power Factor Power Factor 0 ~ 1.00 0.01 0.78 ×
Mot
or ra
ted
para
met
ers
F1.09 Motor Overload Protection Factor
Electronic Thermo-relay
20.0 ~ 110.0% 0.1% 100.0%
F1.10 Motor Autotuning Mask Autotuning Mask
0: F1.11 disabled 1: F1.11 enabled
1 0 ×
F1.11 Motor Auto-tuning Autotuning
0: no operation 1: auto-tuning starts (This value will restore to 0 automatically after tuning.) 2: macro-tuning starts (This value will restore to 0 automatically after tuning.)
1 0 ×
F1.12 Stator Resistance Rs 0.000 ~ 9.999Ω 0.001Ω Motor rating
×
F1.13 Stator Inductor Ls 0.0 ~ 999.9mH 0.1mH Motor rating
×
F1.14 Rotor Resistance Rr 0.000 ~ 9.999Ω 0.001Ω Motor rating
×
F1.15 Rotor Inductor Lr 0.0 ~ 999.9mH 0.1mH Motor rating
×
Mot
or tu
ning
and
par
amet
ers
F1.16 Mutual Inductance Lm 0.0 ~ 999.9mH 0.1mH Motor rating
×
34 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Cla
ss
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
F1.17 Excitation Current Unload Current 0.0 ~ 999.9A 0.1AMotor rating
×
F2: Vector Control Functions
Type Function
code Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default Modifiable
User setting
F2.00 ASR Proportional Gain 1 ASR1-P 0.000 ~ 9.999 ~ 0.001 ~ 2.000 ;
F2.01 ASR Integral Time 1 ASR1-I 0: no action 0.01 ~ 99.99s
0.01s 1.00s ;
F2.02 ASR Proportional Gain 2 ASR2-P 0.000 ~ 9.999 ~ 0.001 ~ 3.000 ;
F2.03 ASR Integral Time 2 ASR2-I 0: no action 0.01 ~ 99.99s
0.01s 0.50s ;
F2.04 ASR Switching Frequency ASR Switching Frequency
0.01 ~ 99.99s 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ; Spe
ed re
gula
tor
F2.05 Slip Compensation Gain Slip Compensation Gain 50.0 ~ 250.0% 0.1% 100.0% × F2.06 Drive Torque Limit Drive Torque Limit 0.0 ~ 180.0% 0.1% 180.0% ×
Torq
ue
cont
rol
F2.07 Brake Torque Limit Brake Torque Limit 0.0 ~ 180.0% 0.1% 180.0% ×
F2.08 Pre-torque Select Pre-torque Select 0: pre-torque disabled 1: digital pre-torque 2: analog pre-torque
1 0 ×
F2.09 Digital Weigh Signal 1 Digital Weigh Signal 1 0 ~ 100% rated weight 1% 10% ; F2.10 Digital Weigh Signal 2 Digital Weigh Signal 2 0 ~ 100% rated weight 1% 25% ; F2.11 Digital Weigh Signal 3 Digital Weigh Signal 3 0 ~ 100% rated weight 1% 50% ; F2.12 Digital Weigh Signal 4 Digital Weigh Signal 4 0 ~ 100% rated weight 1% 80% ; F2.13 Filter Rate Filter Rate 0 ~ 63 1 17 ; F2.14 Torque Bias Torque Bias 0.0% ~ 100.0% 0.1% 0 ;
F2.15 Torque Bias Gain (drive side)
Drive Torque Gain 0.000 ~ 7.000 0.001 0 ;
F2.16 Torque Bias Gain (brake side)
Brake Torque Gain 0.000 ~ 7.000 0.001 0 ;
F2.17 Unloaded Current Rise Unload Current Boost 0% ~ 100% 1% 25% ×
F2.18 Unloaded Current Frequency Switching Point
Unload Current Switch 0.0 ~ 50.0Hz 0.1Hz 30.0Hz ×
F2.19 Current Loop KP Current Loop KP 0 ~ 9999 1 2500 ;
Torq
ue b
ias
F2.20 Current Loop KI Current Loop KI 0 ~ 9999 1 1500 ; F3: Speed Curve
Type Function
code Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default Modifiable
User setting
F3.00 Start Speed Start Speed 0 ~ 0.250m/s 0.001m/s 0 × F3.01 Start Time Start Time 0.000 ~ 2.000s 0.001s 0 × Start/stop
parameters F3.02 Jerky Dec Stop Deceleration Jerk 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 0.001m/s3 0.350m/s3 × F3.03 MS 0 MS 0 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.04 MS 1 MS 1 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.05 MS 2 MS 2 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.06 MS 3 MS 3 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.07 MS 4 MS 4 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.08 MS 5 MS 5 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ;
Normal operation parameters F3.09 MS 6 MS 6 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ;
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes 35
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Type Function
code Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default Modifiable
User setting
F3.10 MS 7 MS 7 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ; F3.11 Acceleration Rate Acceleration Rate 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 0.700m/s2 ×
F3.12 Acceleration Jerk at Start Section
Start Acceleration Jerk 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 0.001m/s3 0.350m/s3 ×
F3.13 Acceleration Jerk at End Section
End Acceleration Jerk 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 0.001m/s3 0.600m/s3 ×
F3.14 Dec Rate Deceleration Rate 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 0.700m/s2 ×
F3.15 Dec Jerk at Start Section
Start Deceleration Jerk 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 0.001m/s3 0.600m/s3 ×
Normal operation parameters
F3.16 Dec Jerk at End Section
End Deceleration Jerk 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 0.001m/s3 0.350m/s3 ×
F3.17 Autolearning Speed Auto-learning Speed 0 ~ MIN (0.630m/s, F0.05)
0.001m/s 0.400m/s ×
F3.18 Battery-Driven Running Speed
Emergency Speed 0 ~ MIN (0.500m/s, F0.05)
0.001m/s 0 ×
F3.19 Battery Driven Acc/Dec
Emergency Acc/Dec 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 1.000m/s2 ×
F3.20 Inspection Running Speed
Inspection Speed 0 ~ MIN (0.630m/s, F0.05)
0.001m/s 0.400m/s ×
F3.21 Inspection Running Dec
Inspection Deceleration 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 1.000m/s2 ×
F3.22 Creeping Speed Creeping Speed 0.020 ~ 0.500m/s 0.001m/s 0.050m/s × F3.23 Forced Dec 1 Forced Deceleration 1 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 1.000m/s2 ×
F3.24 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 1
Speed In LS1 0 ~ 100.0 % (rated elevator speed)
0.1 % 97.0 % ×
F3.25 Forced Dec 2 Forced Deceleration 2 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 0.900m/s2 ×
F3.26 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 2
Speed In LS2 0 ~ 100.0 % (rated elevator speed)
0.1 % 97.0 % ×
F3.27 Forced Dec 3 Forced Deceleration 3 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 0.001m/s2 0.700m/s2 ×
Special operation parameters
F3.28 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 3
Speed In LS3 0 ~ 100.0 % (rated elevator speed)
0.1 % 97.0 % ×
F4: Distance Control Parameters
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default ModifiableUser
settingF4.00 Floor Number Floor Number 2 ~ 50 1 15 ×
F4.01 Max. Floor Height MAX Floor Height
0.00 ~ 30.00m 0.01m 3.50m ×
F4.02 Max. Speed of Curve 1 VMAX1 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 × F4.03 Max. Speed of Curve 2 VMAX2 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 × F4.04 Max. Speed of Curve 3 VMAX3 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 × F4.05 Max. Speed of Curve 4 VMAX4 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 × F4.06 Max. Speed of Curve 5 VMAX5 0 ~ F0.05 0.001m/s 0 ×
F4.07 Leveling Distance Levelling Distance
0 ~ 500mm 1mm 0 ×
F4.08 Floor Height Frequency Division Rate
Height Division Rate
1 ~ 60000 1 1 *
F4.09 Floor Height 1 Floor Height 1 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.10 Floor Height 2 Floor Height 2 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.11 Floor Height 3 Floor Height 3 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.12 Floor Height 4 Floor Height 4 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.13 Floor Height 5 Floor Height 5 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 ×
36 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit Default ModifiableUser
settingF4.14 Floor Height 6 Floor Height 6 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.15 Floor Height 7 Floor Height 7 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.16 Floor Height 8 Floor Height 8 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.17 Floor Height 9 Floor Height 9 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.18 Floor Height 10 Floor Height 10 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.19 Floor Height 11 Floor Height 11 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.20 Floor Height 12 Floor Height 12 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.21 Floor Height 13 Floor Height 13 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.22 Floor Height 14 Floor Height 14 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.23 Floor Height 15 Floor Height 15 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.24 Floor Height 16 Floor Height 16 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.25 Floor Height 17 Floor Height 17 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.26 Floor Height 18 Floor Height 18 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.27 Floor Height 19 Floor Height 19 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.28 Floor Height 20 Floor Height 20 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.29 Floor Height 21 Floor Height 21 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.30 Floor Height 22 Floor Height 22 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.31 Floor Height 23 Floor Height 23 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.32 Floor Height 24 Floor Height 24 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.33 Floor Height 25 Floor Height 25 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.34 Floor Height 26 Floor Height 26 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.35 Floor Height 27 Floor Height 27 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.36 Floor Height 28 Floor Height 28 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.37 Floor Height 29 Floor Height 29 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.38 Floor Height 30 Floor Height 30 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.39 Floor Height 31 Floor Height 31 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.40 Floor Height 32 Floor Height 32 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.41 Floor Height 33 Floor Height 33 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.42 Floor Height 34 Floor Height 34 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.43 Floor Height 35 Floor Height 35 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.44 Floor Height 36 Floor Height 36 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.45 Floor Height 37 Floor Height 37 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.46 Floor Height 38 Floor Height 38 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.47 Floor Height 39 Floor Height 39 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.48 Floor Height 40 Floor Height 40 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.49 Floor Height 41 Floor Height 41 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.50 Floor Height 42 Floor Height 42 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.51 Floor Height 43 Floor Height 43 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.52 Floor Height 44 Floor Height 44 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.53 Floor Height 45 Floor Height 45 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.54 Floor Height 46 Floor Height 46 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.55 Floor Height 47 Floor Height 47 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.56 Floor Height 48 Floor Height 48 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 × F4.57 Floor Height 49 Floor Height 49 0 ~ 50000 (pulse number divided by F4.08) 1 0 ×
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes 37
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
F5: Digital I/O Terminals
Type Function
code Name
LCD Display
Range Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
F5.00 X1 Terminal Function
X1 Terminal Function
1 34 ×
F5.01 X2 Terminal Function
X2 Terminal Function
1 35 ×
F5.02 X3 Terminal Function
X3 Terminal Function
1 38 ×
F5.03 X4 Terminal Function
X4 Terminal Function
1 39 ×
F5.04 X5 Terminal Function
X5 Terminal Function
1 15 ×
F5.05 X6 Terminal Function
X6 Terminal Function
1 8 ×
F5.06 X7 Terminal Function
X7 Terminal Function
1 9 ×
F5.07 X8 Terminal Function
X8 Terminal Function
1 10 ×
F5.08 X9 Terminal Function
X9 Terminal Function
1 12 ×
F5.09 X10 Terminal Function
X10 Terminal Function
1 14 ×
F5.10 X11 Terminal Function
X11 Terminal Function
1 22 ×
F5.11 X12 Terminal Function
X12 Terminal Function
1 23 ×
F5.12 X13 Terminal Function
X13 Terminal Function
1 24 ×
Dig
ital I
nput
Ter
min
al
F5.13 X14 Terminal Function
X14 Terminal Function
0: disable 1: floor instruction 1 (F1) 2: floor instruction 2 (F2) 3: floor instruction 3 (F3) 4: floor instruction 4 (F4) 5: floor instruction 5 (F5) 6: floor instruction 6 (F6) 7: floor initialization (INI) 8: MS terminal 1 (MS1) 9: MS terminal 2 (MS2) 10: MS terminal 3 (MS3) 11: UP forced Dec 1 input, normally open (2LS1) 12: UP forced Dec 1 input, normally closed (2LS1)13: DOWN forced Dec 1 input, normally open (1LS1) 14: DOWN forced Dec 1 input, normally closed (1LS2) 15: distance control enabled (DCE) 16: external fault input, normally open (EXT1) 17: external fault input, normally closed (EXT2) 18: external reset command input (RST) 19: battery-driven running (BAT) 20: brake feedback input, normally open (BSM1) 21: brake feedback input, normally closed (BSM2)22: digital weight signal 1 (WD1) 23: digital weight signal 2 (WD2) 24: digital weight signal 3 (WD3) 25: digital weight signal 4 (WD4) 26: UP forced Dec 2 input, normally open (4LS1) 27: UP forced Dec 2 input, normally closed (4LS2)28: DOWN forced Dec 2 input, normally open (3LS1) 29: DOWN forced Dec 2 input, normally closed (3LS2) 30: UP forced Dec 3 input, normally open (6LS1) 31: UP forced Dec 3 input, normally closed (6LS2)32: DOWN forced Dec 3 input, normally open (5LS1) 33: DOWN forced Dec 3 input, normally closed (5LS2) 34: drive enable (ENA) 35: floor auto-learn (SL) 36: contactor feedback normally open (CSM1) 37: contactor feedback normally closed (CSM2) 38: inspection running (INS) 39: stop request (REQ) 40: floor setting (FLE) 41: Reserved 42: Reserved 43: programmable logic
1 25 ×
38 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Type Function
code Name LCD display Range
Min. unit
Default ModifiableUse
settingF5.14 Logic 0000 Logic 0000 1 1024 × F5.15 Logic 0001 Logic 0001 1 1024 × F5.16 Logic 0010 Logic 0010 1 1024 × F5.17 Logic 0011 Logic 0011 1 1024 × F5.18 Logic 0100 Logic 0100 1 1024 × F5.19 Logic 0101 Logic 0101 1 1024 × F5.20 Logic 0110 Logic 0110 1 1024 × F5.21 Logic 0111 Logic 0111 1 1024 × F5.22 Logic 1000 Logic 1000 1 1024 × F5.23 Logic 1001 Logic 1001 1 1024 × F5.24 Logic 1010 Logic 1010 1 1024 × F5.25 Logic 1011 Logic 1011 1 1024 × F5.26 Logic 1100 Logic 1100 1 1024 × F5.27 Logic 1101 Logic 1101 1 1024 × F5.28 Logic 1110 Logic 1110 1 1024 ×
Pro
gram
mab
le lo
gic
F5.29 Logic 1111 Logic 1111
0 ~ 1024
1 1024 ×
F5.30 Y1 Function Select Y1 Function Select
1 1 ×
F5.31 Y2 Function Select Y2 Function Select
1 14 ×
F5.32 CR Function Select CR Function Select
1 19 ×
F5.33 BR Function Select BR Function Select
1 18 ×
Dig
ital o
utpu
t
F5.34 TR Function Select TR Function Select
0: Drive ready 1: Running 2: Accelerating 3: Decelerating 4: Zero speed running 5: Autolearning 6: Passing Dec point 7: Elevator stop 8: Door pre-opening output 9: Frequency detected signal 1 10: Frequency detected signal 211: FWD 12: REV 13: Speed limit signal 14: Zero speed signal 15: Reserved 16: Drive pre-alarm 17: Output prohibited 18: Braking control 19: Contactor control 20: Fault output
1 20 ×
F5.35 Y1, Y2, CR & BR Action Mode Select
Action Mode Select
0 ~ 15 1 0 ×
F5.36 Dec-point Output Adjust Dec-point Output 0.050 ~ 2.000s 0.001s 0.250s ×
F5.37 Frequency Detected Signal 1 (FDT1) Level
FDT1 Level 0 ~ 100% (elevator rated speed) 0.1% 10.0% ×
F5.38 Frequency Detected Signal 2 (FDT2) Level
FDT1 Level 0 ~ 100% (elevator rated speed) 0.1% 95.0% ×
F5.39 FDT Signal (Lag) FDT Delay 0 ~ 10.0% (elevator rated speed) 0.1% 1.0% ×
Dig
ital o
utpu
t
F5.40 Speed Detect Range FAR 0.0 ~ 20.0% (elevator rated speed)
0.1% 5.0% ×
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes 39
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
F6: Analog I/O
Type Function
code Name LCD DISPLAY Range
Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
F6.00 AI1 Filter Time Constant
AI1 Filter Time 0.002 ~ 5.000s 0.001s 0.100s ; Analog input
F6.01 AI2 Filter Time Constant
AI2 Filter Time 0.002 ~ 5.000s 0.001s 0.010s ;
F6.02 AO1 Function Select Analog Output 1 1 0 ;
Analog output F6.03 AO2 Function Select Analog Output 2
0: Running speed (0-MAX) 1: Preset speed (0-MAX) 2: Output current (0-2 times of rating) 3: Output voltage (0-1.2 times of rating) AI1 preset input AI2 preset input 6: Output torque (0-2 times of rating) 7: Torque bias balance adjust 8: Torque bias gain adjust 9: Speed difference (±10Hz)
1 2 ;
F6.04 Analog Input Select Analog Input Select0: AI1 speed, AI2 weigh 1: AI1 weigh, AI2 speed
1 1 ×
F6.05 AI1 Zero Bias Adjust AI1 Zero Adjust -500mV ~ 500mV 1 0 × Analog input
F6.06 AI2 zero bias adjust AI2 Zero Adjust -500mV ~ 500mV 1 0 × F7: Optimal Option
Function code
Name LCD DISPLAY Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
settingF7.00 Brake Release Delay Brake On Delay 0.000 ~ 2.000s 0.001s 0 × F7.01 Brake Close Delay Brake Off Delay 0.000 ~ 1.000s 0.001s 0 × F7.02 Feedback Input Select Feedback Signal Select 0 ~ 4095 1 0 ×
F7.03 Encoder Frequency Division Rate
Encoder Division Rate 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10…128 1 8 ;
F7.04 Start Ramp Time Start Ramp Time 0: Start ramp disabled 0.001 ~ 2.000s
0.001s 0 ×
F7.05 Fault Mask Fault Mask 0 ~ 1023 1 0 ×
F7.06 Fault Autoreset Times Fault RST Times 0: Autoreset disabled 1 ~ 10: Autoreset times
1 0 ×
F7.07 Fault Reset Interval Reset Interval 2 ~ 20s 1s 5s × F7.08 MS Inspection Select Multi-speed Inspection 0, 1 ~ 7 1 0 ×
F8: Communication Parameters
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
F8.00 Baudrate Select Baudrate Select
0: 1200BPS 1: 2400BPS 2: 4800BPS 3: 9600BPS 4: 19200BPS 5: 38400BPS 6: 115200BPS 7: 125000BPS
1 4 ×
F8.01 Data Format Data Format
0: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity check. 1: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even check 2: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd check 3: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity check 4: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, even check 5: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd check
1 0 ×
40 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code
Name LCD Display Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
settingF8.02 Local Address Local Address 0 ~ 247 1 5 ×
F8.03 Communication Time Out Delay
Time Out Delay 0: Delay disabled 0.1 ~ 100.0s
0.1s 0 ×
F8.04 Communication Delay Time
Communication Delay Time
0.000 ~ 1.000s 0.001
s 0 ×
F9: Keypad Monitoring
Type Function
code Name LCD DISPLAY Range:
Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
F9.00 LED Displayed Parameters in Running State (1)
Monitor Para. 1
Bit0: Running speed (m/s) Bit1: Output voltage (V) Bit2: Output current (A) Bit3: Output power (%) Bit4: Rotation speed (r/min) Bit5: Output frequency (Hz) Bit6: Set speed (m/s) Bit7: Present floor Bit8: Present position (m)
1 55 ;
F9.01 LED Displayed Parameters in Running State (2)
Monitor Para. 2
7: DC bus voltage (V-AVE) Bit1: Torque bias gain adjust (V) Bit2: Input terminal group 1 state (HEX) Bit3: Input terminal group 2 state (HEX) Bit4: Input terminal group 3 state (HEX) Bit5: Output terminal group state (HEX) 4: Analog input AI1 value (V) 4: Analog input AI1 value (V) Bit8: Pre-torque compensation (%)
1 0 ;
F9.02 LED Displayed Parameters in Standby State (Blink)
Monitor Para. 3
0: Elevator rated speed (m/s) 1: Input terminal group 1 state (HEX) 2: Input terminal group 2 state (HEX) 3: Input terminal group 3 state (HEX) 4: Output terminal group state (HEX) 5: Analog input AI1 (V) 6: Analog input AI2 (V) 7: torque bias balance adjust (V) 8: Dec distance (m) 9: Pre-torque compensation (%) 10: Present floor 11: Present position (m) 12: DC bus voltage (V-AVE) 13: Curve min. running distance (m) 14: Set speed (m/s)
1 0 ;
F9.03 Present Floor Present Floor 1 ~ 50 1 1 ×
F9.04 Elevator Operation Counter High
Elevator Oper. Counter High
0 ~ 9999 1 0 ×
Mon
itore
d pa
ram
eter
s
F9.05 Elevator Operation Counter Low
Elevator Oper. Counter Low
0 ~ 9999 1 0 ×
Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes 41
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Type Function
code Name LCD DISPLAY Range:
Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
settingF9.06 No.1 Fault Type Fault Message 1 1 0 * F9.07 No.2 Fault Type Fault Message 2 1 0 * F9.08 No.3 Fault Type Fault Message 3
0 ~ 35
1 0 *
F9.09 Running Speed at Last Fault
Last Fault Elevator Speed
0 ~ 4.000m/s 0.001m/s
0 *
F9.10 Output Current at Last Fault
Last Fault Output Current
0.0 ~ 999.9A 0.1A 0 *
F9.11 Bus voltage at Last Fault (V)
Last Fault DC Bus Voltage
0 ~ 999V 1V 0 *
F9.12 Input Terminal Group 1 State at Last Fault
Last Fault Terminal Group 1
0 ~ 00FFH 1 0 *
F9.13 Input Terminal Group 2 State at Last Fault
Last Fault Terminal Group 2
0 ~ 00FFH 1 0 *
F9.14 Input Terminal Group 3 State at Last Fault
Last Fault Terminal Group 3
0 ~ 00FFH 1 0 *
Fault record
F9.15 Output Terminal Group State at Last Fault
Last Fault OutputTerminals
0 ~ 00FFH 1 0 *
F9.16 Temperature of Power Module
Power Module Temperature
0 ~ 98.0°C 0.1°C 0 *
F9.17 Total Work Time Total Work Time 0 ~ 65535h 1h 0 *
F9.18 Elevator Present Pulse Position High Digits
Pulse Number High
0 ~ 65535 1 0 *
F9.19 Elevator Present Pulse Position Low Digits
Pulse Number Low
0 ~ 65535 1 0 *
F9.20 Control Software Version Control Software Version
00.00 ~ 99.99 0.01 Set
upon delivery
*
State parameters
F9.21 Panel Software Version Panel Software Version
00.00 ~ 99.99 0.01 Set
upon delivery
*
FA: PG Function
Function code
Name LCD DISPLAY Range: Min. unit
Default ModifiableUser
setting
FA.00 PG Type PG Type
0: 12V incremental 1: 5V differential 2: UVW incremental 3: SINCOS
1 0 ×
FA.01 PG Check Time PG Check Time 0 ~ 10.0s 0: Check function disabled
0.1s 0 ×
FA.02 PG Reversion Enable PG REV. Enable 0: same direction 1: reverse
1 0 ×
FA.03 Flux Pole Original Angle Flux Pole Original Angle 0.0 ~ 359.9° 0.1° 0 × FA.04 C-Phase Amplitude C-Phase Amp. 0 ~ 9999 1 0 × FA.05 C-Phase Offset C-Phase Offset 0 ~ 9999 1 0 × FA.06 D-Phase Amplitude D-Phase Amp. 0 ~ 9999 1 0 × FA.07 D-Phase Offset D-Phase Offset 0 ~ 9999 1 0 ×
FE: Factory Function
Function code
Name LCD
DISPLAY Range: Min. unit Default Modifiable
User setting
FE.00 Factory Password Input
Factory Password
Note: Function codes FE.01 ~ FE.24 are factory reserved
1 Factory setting
-
42 Chapter 5 Tables Of Function Codes
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
5.3 Factory Function Description
FE.00 is a factory password, which enables you to check and change factory set parameters FE.01 ~ FE.24, which include drive model, various voltage and current protection limits, generally useless to end users. Only when the control board is changed will some of these parameters need changing. In that case, please contact the factory or distributor.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 43
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 6 Function Code Description
Introduction: This chapter details the application and value selection of the drive function codes.
Note: In the shadowed boxes below, the value in the bracket [ ] is the default of the parameter, and [*] means the value is a measured/fixed one that cannot be changed.
6.1 Basic Functions (F0.00 ~ F0.10)
F0.00 User Password Range: 0000 ~ 9999 [0] This function allows you to secure your data against unauthorized changes.
After encryption, you must enter correct password before accessing parameters, which you can read and change then. If the password is incorrect, you can only read the parameters.
When this function is enabled, an icon will appear on the bottom right of the LCD when you enter level 2 menus. See section 4.3.5 for detailed description of password setting and changing.
Note 1. Set F0.00 = 0000 to disable password function. 2. Learn by heart or keep well the password, or you cannot configure parameters. In case you forget password, contact us or our local agents. F0.01 Language Selection Range: 0, 1 [0]
Select the LCD language.
0: Chinese
1: English F0.02 Operation Mode Range: 0 ~ 5 [0]
Select an operation mode in which the drive receives start/stop command and speed instruction.
0: keypad control
The RUN/STOP key on keypad controls the drive start/stop. The speed is set through F0.03.
1: terminal analog control
Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. Terminal AI1/AI2 give the speed instruction.
AI1 input can be current or voltage signal, determined by CN16 on the control board. The input of 0~10V/0~20mA at AI1-GND corresponds to 0 ~ rated speed.
See Figure 6-1 for the analog input and speed relation.
0 10V (20mA)Voltage/current
F0.05 (ratedspeed)
Speed
F6.05/F6.06
Figure 6-1 Speed and analog-input relation
2: 2: terminal speed control
Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. Terminals MS1 ~ MS3 in combination gives the speed instruction.
3: terminal distance control
Terminals FWD and REV give the running command. The FLE and destination floor signal (set by F1 ~ F6) in combination determines the running speed. The drive can calculate where to stop based on distance control principle.
4: host-computer speed control
The host gives the running command and sets the speed through communication.
5: host-computer distance control
The host gives the running command. The speed is auto-calculated based on destination floor (set via host) and distance control principle.
Note 1. The keypad control mode is used for factory commissioning, not for actual application. In this mode, no terminal state, except the external fault EXT terminal, will be detected. 2. Generally, only one of the above 6 operation modes is valid at once. However, terminal speed control mode has higher priority level than terminal distance control mode, i.e. when the drive stays at standby state, if both MS1 ~ MS3 and FLE are selected, speed control prevails. Similarly, the host computer speed control is valid if host computer distance control is selected first. But anyhow, the operation mode cannot be changed if not in standby state. 3. When terminal speed control mode is selected, another distance control mode is derived, i.e. distance control upon STOP request. Terminal DCE must be valid, the running command is controlled by FWD and REV. The running speed is calculated automatically based on the distance control principle upon REQ command. Similarly, communication distance control mode is derived when communication speed control is selected.
44 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
The combination of F0.02 and terminals can determine 6 operation modes, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Operation mode and running mode relation
F0.02 value Terminal input Speed setting Direction setting Running mode 0 Default F0.03 Default: FWD Normal 1 AI1/AI2 The speed corresponding to analog input FWD/REV Normal
MS1 ~ MS3 The MS (Multi-Speed) corresponding to the combination of terminals MS1 ~ MS3
FWD/REV Multi-speed 2
DCE, REQ Calculated according to distance FWD/REV Distance control
MS1 ~ MS3 The MS corresponding to the combination of terminals MS1 ~ MS3
FWD/REV Multi-speed 3
FLE, F1 ~ F6 Calculated according to distance FWD/REV Distance control 4 Same with F0.02=2 except that the input command is given by the host computer 5 Same with F0.02=3 except that the input command is given by the host computer
1 ~ 5 SL Default F3.17 FWD Auto-learn 1 ~ 5 INS Default F3.19 FWD/REV Inspection 1 ~ 5 BAT Default F3.18 FWD/REV Battery-driven
Note Autolearning, inspection and battery-driven modes are special running modes. They are valid when F0.02 is set to 1 ~ 5 and they have higher priority than normal running modes. In addition, MS running is prior to distance control running. See Appendix 2 Communication Protocol for information of host computer instructions.
F0.03 Digital Speed Setup Range: 0 ~ Rated Speed [0] 0: valid
Defining the initial speed in keypad control mode, this value can be changed in the running to change the speed, and will not be lost even upon power failure. F0.04 Running Direction Range: 0, 1 [0]
0: FWD
1: REV
This function code applies to all control modes. F0.05 Elevator Rated Speed Range: 0.100 ~ 4.000m/s [1.500m/s]
F0.05 is the rated speed on elevator nameplate. All speed settings must not exceed this value. Elevator rated speed range: 0.100 F0.05 MIN (max. speed of traction machine, 4.000m/s)
Below is the formula for the max speed of traction machine:
Max. speed =P (pole-pair number)
F0.06 X F1.07
P (pole-pair number) =ND (motor syn. speed)
60 x F1.05
F0.06 Max. Output Frequency Range: 1.00 ~ 99.99Hz
The max. output frequency of drive, the fmax in Figure 6-2.
In Figure 6-2, the variants are:
fb: basic output frequency. The lowest output frequency corresponding to the max. output voltage. By default, it is the motor rated frequency.
Vmax: Drive max. output voltage, i.e., the rated output voltage corresponding to the drive basic operation frequency. By default, it is 380V.
fL: frequency lower limit. By default: 0.
fH: frequency upper limit. By default: fmax.
fmax
Output voltage
fH fbfL Output frequency
Vmax
Figure 6-2 Definition of feature parameters
F0.07 Carrier Frequency Range: 5 ~ 16kHz Carrier frequency of the drive output PWM wave.
This parameter, when properly set, can reduce noise and leakage current of output circuit, avoid mechanical resonance and suppress interference.
Table 6-2 Carrier frequency vs. motor performance
Carrier frequency
Motor noise
Output current wave
Leakage current
Interference
Increase Decrease Improve increase increase
Note When the carrier frequency is above 8kHz, the motor can work quietly. Within the allowed range, lower carrier frequency is recommended. When higher than the default, every increase of 1kHz in carrier frequency demands an drive derating of 5%.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 45
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
F0.08 Parameter Update 1 Range: 0, 1, 2 [0] 0: no operation
1: Clear memory.
Clear F9.06 ~ F9.15.
2: Restore to defaults.
Restore to defaults all parameters except F1.00 ~ F1.17, F9.04 ~ F9.21 and FA.00 ~ FA.07 according to drive model.
Note: The parameter value will be restored to 0 after any operation. F0.09 Parameter Update 2 Range: 0, 1, 2 [0]
0: No operation.
1: Transfer data from control board to keypad.
Transfer the parameters F0.00 ~ FA.07 (except F9.04 ~ F9.21) from control board to keypad memory.
2: Transfer data from keypad to control board.
Transfer the parameters F0.00 ~ FA.07 (except F9.04 ~ F9.21) from keypad memory to control board.
Note: The parameter value will be restored to 0 after any operation.
Note During the up/down load, if E023 occurs, the up/down load is a failure. See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for solution. F0.10 Parameter Display Range: 0, 1 [0]
0: Display all.
1: Display only the non-defaults.
6.2 Traction Machine Parameters
(F1.00 ~ F1.17)
F1.00 PG Pulse Selection Range: 1 ~ 9999 [1024] Number of pulses set according to the PG type, meaning the number of pulses generated when the motor rotates a circle.
Note This parameter is invalid in the open-loop vector control, but must be set correctly in the close-loop vector control. F1.01 Control Mode Range: 0, 1, 2, 3 [1]
0: Asynchronous open-loop vector control
Sensorless vector control, applied to testing, or low cost elevators that runs slow and has low precision requirements.
1: Asynchronous close-loop vector control 1
Sensored asynchronous vector control 1 needs motor parameters. It is applied to high-precision speed control,
torque control and position servo control where high dynamic performance is a must.
2: Asynchronous close-loop vector control 2
Sensored asynchronous vector control 2 does not need motor parameters, but F1.08 (motor power factor) must be set correctly. It is applied to high-precision speed control, vector control and position servo control where high dynamic performance is a must.
3: Synchronous close-loop vector control
Sensored synchronous vector control needs UVW incremental PG or SINCOS PG (set through FA.00) and motor parameters. It is applied to high-precision speed control, vector control and position servo control where high dynamic performance is a must.
Note 1. Except asynchronous close-loop vector control 2, all close-loop vector control modes require motor auto-tuning first to get the motor parameters, which will be stored in the drive’s control board once obtained. 2. Set the speed regulator and current loop regulator correctly to ensure good static/dynamic control performance. See description of parameter group F3 for detailed regulator setting. 3. The sensored vector control modes require correcting setting of PG type (FA.00).
F1.02 Motor Power Range: 0.4 ~ 999.9kW [drive model dependant]
F1.03 Motor Rated Voltage Range: 1 ~ 999V [drive model dependant]
F1.04 Motor Rated Current Range: 0.1 ~ 999.9A [drive model dependant]
F1.05 Motor Rated Frequency Range: 1.00 ~ 99.99z [50.00Hz]
F1.06 Motor Rated Speed Range: 1 ~ 9999r/min [1440r/min]
F1.02 ~ F1.06 are set by default according to the standard matched motor.
If F1.02 (Motor Power) is changed, other motor parameters as listed below will change automatically according to standard 3-phase motor parameters.
F1.03: Motor Rated Voltage
F1.04: Motor Rated Current
F1.05: Motor Rated Frequency
F1.06: Motor Rated Speed
F1.12: Stator Resistance
F1.13: Stator Inductance
F1.14: Rotor Resistance
F1.15: Rotor Inductance
F1.16: Mutual Inductance
F1.17: Excitation Current
Set F1.02 ~ F1.06 according to the nameplate of the traction machine.
46 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Note In the vector control mode, the drive power should not be more than one grade bigger or two grades smaller than the motor rated power (set through F1.02). Otherwise the control performance may decrease, or the driving system may go wrong. F1.07 Traction Machine Mechanical Parameters
Range: 10.0 ~ 6000 [60.0]
The traction machine mechanical parameters are calculated based on the traction machine parameters. It reflects the relationship between elevator speed and motor speed and determines the control precision.
The elevator speed and motor speed relationship is shown below:
Elevator speed (m/s) =Motor rotation speed (rpm)
60x F1.07
1000 The formula for calculating traction machine mechanical parameters is as below:
F1.07 = %Di% winding mode
D: Diameter of traction machine (mm)
i: Dec rate
Winding style: the way that the hoist cable is wound, set according to the actual elevator setting.
Note Do not change F1.07 after setting it according to the traction machine parameter, for it is dangerous when the elevator set speed is inconsistent with actual speed. F1.08 Motor Power Factor Range: 0 ~ 1.00 [0.78]
You need to set the motor power factor when you choose asynchronous close-loop vector control 2.
Consult the manufacturer of the traction machine if this parameter is not on the machine’s nameplate.
F1.09 Motor Overload Protection Factor
Range: 20.0% ~ 110. 0% [100.0%]
The motor overload protection factor can be set to 100% when the drive drives a motor of the same power class.
When the output current is not bigger than 150% of the drive rated current, the motor overload protection will not act, but the drive overload protection will act, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Motor overloadprotection curve
Rated current150%
Drive overloadprotection curve
2 minute
Time
1 hour
Figure 6-3 Drive overload prtc vs. motor overload prtc
To protect the motor when the motor power is smaller than the standard matched power, you need to set a proper motor overload protection factor as shown in Figure 6-4. The factor can derive from the following formula:
Motor overloadprotetction factor
Motor rated current
Drive rated outputcurrent
×100%=
Rated current
Motor overloadprotection factor
100%80%
1 minute
Time
220%176%120% 150%
1 hour
Figure 6-4 Setting motor overload protection factor
F1.10 Motor Auto-tuning Mask Range: 0, 1 [0] F1.11 Motor Auto-tuning Range: 0, 1, 2 [0]
F1.10 is used to protect the motor tuning. You should set F1.10 to 1 if motor tuning is needed.
By setting F1.11, you can tune motor parameters.
Table 6-3 Function description of F1.11
F1.11 value Function 0 No operation 1 Start tuning 2 Start macro tuning
Note 1. Tuning can be performed only in keypad control mode (F0.02=0). Precision vector control requires motor parameters, and auto-tuning is therefore necessary if the parameters are unknown. 2. After the tuning is over, or when the drive is repowered, F1.11 will be restored to 0 automatically. 3. Only EXT terminal state is inspected during the tuning. 4. Do not start tuning when the motor is loaded. 5. Make sure the motor is in standby state before tuning, or the tuning cannot proceed normally. 6. If motor model is changed (through FE parameter group), you need to enter the correct motor nameplate parameters again before tuning.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 47
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Do remove the load off the motor during tuning.Pay close attention to the safety during tuning. At anyabnormality, press the STOP key to stop the tuning.
Danger!
Tuning procedures of asynchronous motors: (F1.01=
0/1):
1. When F1.11 is set to 1:
1) Unload the motor.
2) Release motor brake and close the drive output contactor.
3) Set parameters F1.02 ~ F1.06 according to the traction machine nameplate.
4) Set F1.10 to 1 (enable auto-tuning).
5) Set F1.11 to 1 (start tuning), press the RUN key to start tuning.
During the tuning process, you can press the key to display parameters such as Output Current, Output Voltage, Output Frequency and DC Bus Voltage.
6) The tuning takes a few dozens of seconds. When it is finished, the keypad LCD will display ‘Auto-tune completed’.
2. When F1.11 is set to 2:
1) Unload the motor.
2) Release motor brake and close the drive output contactor.
3) Set F1.10 to 1 (enable auto-tuning).
4) Set F1.11 to 2 (start macro tuning).
5) The keypad LCD will display parameters F1.02 ~ F1.06 one by one. Set the parameters according to the traction machine nameplate.
6) Press the RUN key to start tuning.
7) When tuning is finished, the keypad LCD will display ‘Auto-tune completed’.
If you want to restart the tuning, you should repeat from the first step.
Tuning procedures of synchronous motors (F1.01=3):
For the synchronous motor, you need to connect the PG, set FA.00 (PG Type) and F1.00 (PG Pulse Number) at first. The rest of the tuning process is the same as that of asynchronous motors, which may take a few dozens of seconds.
Note 1. After the tuning, the drive will automatically store the motor data to parameters F1.12 ~ F1.17 for asynchronous motors, or to parameters FA.03 ~ FA.07 for synchronous motors. 2. During the tuning of synchronous motors, if the PG is reversely connected, the drive will report E025 (PG Faulty). You should exchange any two motor phase lines and start tuning again. 3. The synchronous motors need tuning at least twice. Compare the two initial angles (FA.03) of the magnetic pole. A difference
bigger than 10 is too big and tuning should be conducted again. The tuning would be considered acceptable only when the difference is smaller than 10 , or is integer times of the quotient of 360 divided by the No. of motor pole pairs.
F1.12 Stator Resistance Range: 0.000 ~ 9.999Ω [drive model dependant]
F1.13 Stator Inductance Range: 0.0 ~ 999.9mH [drive model dependant]
F1.14 Rotor Resistance Range: 0.000 ~ 9.999Ω [drive model dependant]
F1.15 Rotor Inductance Range: 0.0 ~ 999.9mH [drive model dependant]
F1.16 Mutual Inductance Range: 0.0 ~ 999.9mH [drive model dependant]
F1.17 Excitation Current Range: 0.0 ~ 999.9A [drive model dependant]
The drive will automatically store the tuning result to parameters F1.12 ~ F1.17.
If the motor parameters are already known, you can also set F1.12 ~ F1.17 manually and save the tuning process.
The meaning of motor parameters is shown in the following figure.
Rm
LmI0
I1U1
R1 L1-Lm R2 L2-Lm
1-S R2
I2
S
Figure 6-5 Static equivalent circuit of asynchro motor
In Figure 6-5:
R1: Stator resistance. L1: Stator inductance.
R2: Rotor resistance. L2: Rotor inductance.
LM: Mutual inductance. I0: Excitation current.
6.3 Vector Control (F2.00 ~ F2.20)
F2.00 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Range: 0.000 ~ 9.999 [2.000]
F2.01 ASR Integral Time 1 Range: 0 (disable), 0.01 ~ 99.99s [1.00s]
F2.02 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Range: 0.000 ~ 9.999 [3.000]
F2.03 ASR Integral Time 2 Range: 0 (disable), 0.01 ~ 99.99s [0.50s]
F2.04 ASR Switching Frequency
Range: 0 ~ 400.0Hz
Parameters F2.00 ~ F2.03 are used to set the P (proportional gain) and I (integral time) of Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR), and eventually change the speed response characteristic of vector control.
F2.04 is used to switch between ASR parameters P and I.
PI parameter and switching frequency relationship is shown in Figure 6-6.
48 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Frequency instruction
PI parameter
Switching frequency F2.04
F2.02, F2.03
F2.00, F2.01
Figure 6-6 PI parameter vs. switching frequency
When frequency instruction F2.04, PI parameters are F2.00 and F2.01.
When frequency instruction < F2.04, PI parameter is the weighted average of F2.00, F2.01 and F2.02, F2.03.
When F0.04 is 0, only F2.00 and F2.01 are valid.
The PI parameters can be used to adjust elevator running performance.
1. ASR structure is shown in Figure 6-7, where KP is the proportional gain and KI is the integral time.
Frequencyinstruction
Actual speed
Torque current reference+Speed
difference
Torque limit(F2.06,F2.07)
Kp(1+ )1
KIS-
Figure 6-7 Simplified ASR structure
When the integral time is set to 0, the integral function will be disabled, and the speed loop will be a pure proportion regulator.
2. Adjustment of proportional gain P and integral time I
Increasing the proportional gain P can fasten system dynamic response, but too large P can make the system extremely oscillatory.
Decreasing the integration time I can also fasten system dynamic response, but too small I can make the system extraordinarily over-adjusted and apt to oscillate.
See Fig.6-8.
Instru
ction
spee
d
Greater proportion gain P
Smaller proportion gain P
Smaller integral time
Greater integral time
Instru
ction
spee
d
Figure 6-8 ASR jump response vs. parameters P & I
Usually P is adjusted first, increased to the maximum as long as the system does not oscillate. Then adjust I so that the system responses fast and keep the over-adjustment within reasonable range. Figure 6-9 is an example of speed jump response curve when P and I are adjusted properly. This curve can be observed through analog terminals AO1 and AO2. See the description of F6 parameter group.
Instruction speed
Figure 6-9 Speed jump response curve
3. P&I parameters adjustment in high/low speed running
If the system requires fast speed response for high/low speed running with load, use F2.04 to set ASR switchover frequency and get different PI parameters.
1) Select a proper switching frequency through F2.04.
2) Adjust proportional gain F2.00 and integral time F2.01 in high speed running to ensure good dynamic response characteristic without oscillation.
3) Adjust the proportional gain F2.02 and integral time F2.03 in low speed running state to ensure good dynamic response characteristic without oscillation.
F2.05 Slip Compensation GainRange: 50.0% ~ 250.0% [100.0%]
Slip compensation gain is used to calculate slip frequency. Setting value of 100% means that the rated torque current corresponds to the rated slip frequency. If the loaded motor’s actual speed is faster/slower than the preset speed, you can reduce/increase the slip compensation gain to correct it.
Note In the close-loop vector control mode, the slip compensation gain does not need adjustment. F2.06 Driving Torque Limit
Range: 0 ~ 180.0% (drive rated current) [180.0%]
F2.07 Braking Torque Limit
Range: 0 ~ 180.0% (drive rated current) [180.0%]
The driving torque limit is used to set the torque current output by ASR.
The value of driving torque limit is the percentage of drive’s rated current. 100% of driving torque limit means the limit of torque current is the drive rated current. F2.06 and F2.07 are used to limit the output torque in the driving/braking process, as shown in Figure 6-10.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 49
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Motor Speed
ForwardReverse
Braking State
Braking State
Output Torque
F2.07
F2.07
F2.06
F2.06
Driving State
Driving State
Figure 6-10 Torque limit schematic diagram
Note The bigger the output torque is, the bigger the output current will be. Too big torque limit makes the system apt to overcurrent faults, while too small torque limit will make the running speed and Acc/Dec speed flow away from the preset value. F2.08 Pre-torque Selection Range: 0, 1, 2 [0]
The pre-torque function can output the load balancing torque in advance to avoid reverse and reduce the start impact.
0: Disabled.
1: Digital torque bias
Output balancing torque according to the input digital weight signal.
2: Analog torque bias
Output balancing torque according to the input analog weight signal.
The torque bias control is shown in Figure 6-11.
ASR+
+
Speed instruction
Speed feedback
Car
+
- -
ACR M
Weight sensor
Digitalinput
Torquebias
selectTorque
biasgain
F2.09 weighing signal 1F2.10 weighing signal 2F2.11 weighing signal 3F2.12 weighing signal 4
F2.08=2
F2.08=1
F2.08=0WD1WD2WD3WD4
Digitalweighingsignal
F2.15: Gain at drive sideF2.16: Gain at brake side
AI1
Analogweighingsignal
+
-
F2.14: Pre-torque bias
Analoginputfilter
F6.00: AI1 filtertime constant
Analogzero biasadjust
F6.05: AI1 zerobias adjust
Figure 6-11 Torque bias control
Note 1. Setting F2.08 to 1 (digital torque bias) requires setting a input terminal as digital weight signal (through F5.00 ~ F5.13) and setting F2.09 ~ F2.12 accordingly. 2. Setting F2.08 to 2 (analog torque bias) requires setting AI1/AI2 as analog weight signal input (through F6.04), setting analog input filtering time through F6.00/F6.01 and adjusting AI zero bias through F6.05/F6.06.
F2.09 Digital Weigh Signal 1 Range: 0 ~ 100% (rated load) [10%]F2.10 Digital Weigh Signal 2 Range: 0 ~ 100% (rated load) [25%]F2.11 Digital Weigh Signal 3 Range: 0 ~ 100% (rated load) [50%]F2.12 Digital Weigh Signal 4 Range: 0 ~ 100% (rated load) [85%] The digital weigh signal terminal input and torque bias relation is shown in Table 6-4.
50 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Table 6-4 Digital weight signal vs. torque bias
Terminal state Function Direction Condition Torque bias UP F2.16× (0-F2.14) ×2
All OFF Nil-load DOWN
F2.15× (0-F2.14) ×2
F2.09>F2.14 F2.15× (F2.09-F2.14) ×2 UP
F2.09<F2.14 F2.16× (F2.09-F2.14) ×2
F2.09>F2.14 F2.16× (F2.09-F2.14) ×2 WD1-ON Digital weight signal 1 F2.09
DOWN F2.09<F2.14 F2.15× (F2.09-F2.14) ×2
F2.10>F2.14 F2.15× (F2.10-F2.14) ×2 UP
F2.10<F2.14 F2.16× (F2.10-F2.14) ×2
F2.10>F2.14 F2.16× (F2.10-F2.14) ×2 WD2-ON Digital weight signal 2 F2.10
DOWN F2.10<F2.14 F2.15× (F2.10-F2.14) ×2
F2.11>F2.14 F2.15× (F2.11-F2.14) ×2 UP
F2.11<F2.14 F2.16× (F2.11-F2.14) ×2
F2.11>F2.14 F2.16× (F2.11-F2.14) ×2 WD3-ON
Digital weight signal 3 F2.11
DOWN F2.11<F2.14 F2.15× (F2.11-F2.14) ×2
F2.12>F2.14 F2.15× (F2.12-F2.14) ×2 UP
F2.12<F2.14 F2.16× (F2.12-F2.14) ×2
F2.12>F2.14 F2.16× (F2.12-F2.14) ×2 WD4-ON Digital weight signal 4 F2.12
DOWN F2.12<F2.14 F2.15× (F2.12-F2.14) ×2
F2.14 can be set according to the formula below:
F2.14 = (Counter Weight – Car Weight) / Elevator Rated Load
Note Only one signal from WD1 ~ WD4 terminals is valid at any given time. F2.13 Filter Factor Range: 0 ~ 63 [17]
This parameter is the filter factor based on the speed feedback, as shown in the following figure.
012345
Low speed filtering times
High speed filtering times
BIT
Each filter parameter occupies 3 binary digits. Converter the 3-digit binary code into decimal, the resulting number is the filtering times of the filter parameter.
For example, the high speed needs 3 times of speed filtering. The corresponding binary code is 011B, and the corresponding BIT5, BIT4 and BIT3 are 0, 1 and 1 respectively. The low speed needs once filtering. The corresponding binary digits BIT2, BIT1 and BIT0 are 0, 0 and 1 respectively. Convert the whole 011001B into a decimal value, you get the value of F2.13 – 25.
Note Usually there is no need to regulate the filter factor. When EMI is strong, you can raise the filter factor accordingly.
F2.14 Torque Bias Range: 0 ~ 100.0% F2.15 Torque Bias Gain (Drive Side) Range: 0 ~ 7.000 [0]F2.16 Torque Bias Gain (Brake Side) Range: 0 ~ 7.000 [0]
To set the analog torque bias precisely, you should perform balance adjustment and then gain adjustment. See Figure 6-12 for the schematic diagram.
ASR +
Torquebias gain
F2.15: Gain at drive sideF2.16: Gain at brake side
AI1Analog weighing signal
Torque bias balance adjust output Torque bias gain adjust output
0V~10V/0~20mA
F2.06: Drive torque limitF2.07: Brake torque limit
Torque instruction
+-
+
-
F2.14: Pre-torque bias
Analoginput filter
F6.00: AI1 filtertime constant
Analogzero bias
adjust
F6.05: AI1 zero bias adjust
0V~10V= -100%~+100% 0V~10V= -200%~+200%
Figure 6-12 Torque bias adjust
Adjusting procedures:
1. Balance adjustment:
1) Put balancing load into the elevator car in standby state.
2) Set F6.02(AO1)/F6.03(AO2) to 7 (torque bias balance adjustment). Adjust F2.14 until the output voltage of AO1/AO2 reaches about 5V.
Note You can use a universal meter to measure the AO output voltage, or set F9.02 (LED Displayed Parameters in Standby State) to 7 (Torque bias balance adjust) and use the keypad LED to observe the balance adjustment voltage. 3) If there is no balance load in the elevator car, use the following formula to calculate the value of F2.14:
F2.14 Mbalance V10 V % 100%
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 51
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Mbalance: the designed output voltage of the weighing device when loads are balanced.
2. Gain adjustment:
1) Gain adjustment should be conducted after the balance adjustment.
2) Use the following formula to calculate the initial value of gain adjustment and set F2.15 & F2.16.
F2.15、F2.16 MAX % 100 % %
10 V MMAX V Mbalance V
Mbalance: the designed output voltage of the weighing device when loads are balanced.
MMAX: the designed output voltage of the weighing device at max. load.
MAX : the necessary pre-torque (% of rated torque) at max. load.
3) Unload the elevator car.
Set F6.02 (AO1) or F6.03 (AO2) to 8 (torque bias gain adjustment).
4) Make the elevator run down with nil-load at 2 ~ 10% of rated speed. Use F2.15 to adjust the driving gain until the AO output voltage reaches about 5V.
5) Make the elevator run up with nil-load at 2 ~ 10% of rated speed. Use F2.16 to adjust the braking gain until the AO output voltage reaches about 5V.
Note 1. When AO output voltage is higher than 5V, the value of F2.15/F2.16 should be increased in the driving/braking gain adjustment. 2. When AO output voltage is lower than 5V, the value of F2.15/F2.16 should be decreased in the driving/braking gain adjustment. 3. You can use a universal meter to measure AO output voltage, or set Bit1 (torque bias gain adjustment) of F9.01 (LED Displayed Parameters in Running State) to 1. Use the methods in above mentioned 4) and 5) to adjust the driving gain and braking gain respectively. Meanwhile, check the Torque Bias Gain Adjust through keypad LED. Adjust till the LED display is 5V. F2.17 Unloaded Current Rise Range: 0 ~ 100% [25%] F2.18 Unloaded Current Frequency Switching Point
Range: 0 ~ 50.0Hz [30.0]
F2.17 and F2.18 are used to raise unloaded current (F1.17) to enhance the drive’s capacity at low frequency.
After the unloaded current rise, the excitation current is the sum of F1.17 and the increased value. The following figure shows how the increased value is calculated.
Current
Frequency F2.18 (unloaded current frequency switching point)
F2.17 (unloaded current rise)
Figure 6-13 Increased value of unloaded current
F2.19 Current Loop KP Range: 0 ~ 9999 [2500] F2.20 Current Loop KI Range: 0 ~ 9999 [1500]
F2.19 and F2.20 are the PI regulator parameter of the current ring. Increasing current ring KP/KI can fasten the system dynamic response to the output torque, while decreasing KP/KI can build up system stability.
Too big KP/KI makes the system apt to oscillate, while too small KP/KI affects the system torque output.
Note Please note that for most applications, you do not need to change the PI parameter of the current ring.
6.4 Speed Curve (F3.00 ~ F3.28)
F3.00 Start Speed Range: 0 ~ 0.250m/s [0] F3.01 Start Time Range: 0 ~ 2.000s [0] F7.04 Start Ramp Time Range: 0, 0.001 ~ 2.000s [0]
The Start Speed (F3.00) refers to the initial speed required for starting the drive. Upon drive startup, if the preset speed is less than the start speed, there will be no frequency output. The drive output will jump from zero to the start speed and begin Acc only when the preset speed is bigger or equal to the start speed.
The Start Time (F3.01) is the time in which the drive runs at start speed.
The Start Ramp Time (F7.04) is the time that elevator takes to accelerate from 0 to the rated speed. The start ramp refers to the period between zero speed and the start speed.
When F7.04 is set to 0, the elevator starts from start speed directly.
The start parameters are defined in Figure 6-14.
t
V
F3.00(start speed)
F7.04(start ramp time)
F3.01(start time)
F0.05(rated speed)
Figure 6-14 Start parameters
Note The start speed, when properly set, can minimize the start jerk. F3.02 Jerky Dec Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 [0.350m/s3 ]
The Jerky Dec is the speed change rate of elevator from climbing speed to leveling. This parameter can make the
52 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
elevator more comfortable by smoothening the Dec-to-stop process. See Figure 6-16.
Through cooperation with F3.22 (Creeping Speed), this parameter can set the leveling precision in distance control. F3.03 MS 0 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.04 MS 1 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.05 MS 2 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.06 MS 3 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.07 MS 4 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.08 MS 5 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.09 MS 6 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] F3.10 MS 7 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] Parameters F3.03 ~ F3.10 can set MSs (Multi-Speed), which will be used in MS running.
1. Define control terminals X6, X7 and X8 as MS1, MS2 and MS3 by setting F5.05, F5.06 and F5.07 to 8, 9 and 10 respectively.
2. The wiring is shown in Figure 6-15.
EV3100
(MS1)
(MS2)
(COM)
FWD
COM
.
.
.
.
.(MS3) REW .
K3
K4
K5
K6
(ENA)..
K1
K2
3ph ACpower
MCCB
T
S
R U
V
W
PE
M
Figure 6-15 Wiring of MS running
Control running direction through K5 and K6, you can realize the MS running 0 ~ 7 as listed in the following table through different combinations of K2 (MS1), K3 (MS2) and K4 (MS3). See Figure 6-16.
Table 6-5 MS running selection
MS3 MS2 MS1 Speed setting Function OFF OFF OFF MS 0 F3.03 OFF OFF ON MS 1 F3.04 OFF ON OFF MS 2 F3.05 OFF ON ON MS 3 F3.06 ON OFF OFF MS 4 F3.07 ON OFF ON MS 5 F3.08 ON ON OFF MS 6 F3.09 ON ON ON MS 7 F3.10
Running speed
Time
F3.04F3.05
F3.06
F3.07
F3.08F3.09
F3.10
FWD/REV
MS1
MS2
MS3
F3.03
Figure 6-16 MS running
Note 1. MS 0 (F3.03) is valid only when F0.02 is 2/4. 2. When the drive is under stop-request distance control, F3.03 must be set to 0. F3.11 Acc Rate Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [0.700m/s2 ]F3.12 Start Acc Jerk Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 [0.350m/s3 ]F3.13 End Acc Jerk Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 [0.600m/s3 ]F3.14 Dec Rate Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [0.700m/s2 ]F3.15 Dec Jerk at Start Section
Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 [0.600m/s3 ]
F3.16 Dec Jerk at End Section
Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s3 [0.350m/s3 ]
F3.11 ~ F3.16 are used to set the S curve that can cushion the shock at elevator start/stop and improve riding comfort.
The S curve consists of Acc. rate, Acc. jerk, Dec. rate, and Dec. jerk, as shown in Figure 6-17.
F3.12
F3.11
F3.13 F3.15
F3.14
F3.16
F3.02
F3.00
F3.01
v
t
F3.14
Figure 6-17 S curve parameters
Note
1.F3.11 ~ F3.16 are used to adjust the elevator riding comfort.
2. F3.12 can be used to adjust riding comfort when elevator starts. See Table 6-6 for the setting reference of F3.11 ~ F3.16.
Table 6-6 Curve parameters setting reference
Recommended values Parameter Hospital,
department Office building,
bank Defaults
F3.11 0.500 ~0.800m/s2 0.800~1.200m/s2 0.700m/s2
F3.12 0.150 ~ 0.800m/s3 0.800 ~ 1.200m/s3 0.350m/s3
F3.13 0.500 ~ 0.800m/s3 0.800 ~ 1.200m/s3 0.600m/s3
F3.14 0.500 ~ 0.800m/s2 0.800 ~ 1.200m/s2 0.700m/s2
F3.15 0.500 ~ 0.800m/s3 0.800 ~ 1.200m/s3 0.600m/s3
F3.16 0.250 ~ 0.800m/s3 0.800 ~ 1.200m/s3 0.350m/s3
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 53
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
See Figure 6-18 for the adjustment of S curve.
F3.12
F3.11
F3.13
v
t
Raisingvalue Decreasing value
Figure 6-18 S curve adjustment
As shown in Figure 6-18, the S curve becomes steeper when parameter values are raised. This is true at both the Acc. section and Dec. section.
F3.17 Autolearning Speed Range: 0 ~ MIN (0.630m/s, F0.05) [0.400m/s ]
The Autolearning Speed is used to set the running speed during autolearning.
In distance control mode, the autolearning must be performed first.
The following explains the auto-learn running:
1. When elevator runs from bottom floor to the top, the drive records the height of each floor according to the leveling signal and save the information in F4.09 ~ F4.57.
2. See Figure 6-19 for the wiring of auto-learn running.
EV3100
DWL
COM
FWD
COM
.
.
.
.
.
.
(SL)K4
K5
K6
(ENA).K1
3ph ACpower
MCCB
T
S
R U
V
W
PE
M
UPL
K3(CSM)
K2
.
Figure 6-19 Wiring of auto-learn running
3. See Figure 6-20 for the auto-learn running curve and time sequence.
SL ON
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
ON ON ONOFF OFF
t
v
Autolearning low speed
UPL
N-1 floorF3.17: Autolearning speed
……/ DWL Figure 6-20 Auto-learn running curve
For details of auto-learn running, see Chapter 7 Application Guidance.
F3.18 Battery Driven Running Speed
Range: 0 ~ MIN (0.500m/s, F0.05) [0]
F3.19 Battery Driven Acc/Dec Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2
[1.000m/s2] Setting the speed and Acc/Dec of battery-driven running.
The following explains the battery-driven running.
1. Upon power failures, the control system connects the battery to the drive power circuit terminals (+) and (-). According to the emergency running command (BAT) and direction command (FWD/REV) from the controller, the drive will level at the nearest floor.
2. See Figure 6-21 for the wiring of battery-driven running.
M
KM1
KM2
(BAT)
(-)
3ph input power380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
U
V
W
Emergencypower
(+)
KM
EV3100
-
+KM3
FW D
COM
.
.REW .
K4
K5
Figure 6-21 Wiring of battery-driven running
3. See Figure 6-22 for the battery-driven running curve and time sequence.
ON OFF
Emergency power ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
UPL
BR
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
/ DWL
t
v
ON
Main power
F3.18: Battery driven running speedF3.19F3.19
BAT
CSM
(KM)
(KM3)
FWD/ REV
T1
T2
T3
Figure 6-22 Battery driven running curve
The battery driven running is an optional function. See Chapter 7 for details. F3.20 Inspection Running Speed
Range: 0 ~ MIN (0.630m/s, F0.05) [0.400m/s]
F3.21 Inspection Running Dec Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [1.000m/s2]
Setting the speed and Dec during inspection running.
Select inspection running mode during elevator inspection. See Figure 6-23 for the wiring of inspection running.
54 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
EV3100
(INS)
COM
FWD
COM
.
.
.
.REW .K3
K4
K5
(ENA)
(CSM)
.
.
K1
K2
3ph ACpower
MCCB
T
S
R U
V
W
PE
M
Figure 6-23 Wiring of inspection running
See Figure 6-24 for the inspection running curve and time sequence.
FWD/ ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
OFF
t
v
ONINS
F3.20 (inspection running speed)F3.21 (inspectionrunning deceleration)
REV
F3.11(acceleration)
Figure 6-24 Inspection running curve
Note Being linear, the Acc and Dec in inspection running are set through F3.11 and F3.21 respectively. See Chapter 7 for details. F3.22 Creeping Speed Range: 0.020 ~ 0.500m/s [0.050m/s]
The Creeping Speed is the speed in the following cases:
1. The leveling speed during forced Dec running.
2. The speed in distance control running before leveling.
The elevator runs at creeping speed in the forced Dec. running until it levels. Refer to F3.23 ~ F3.28 for details.
In distance control running, this parameter and F3.02 can be used to adjust leveling precision. F3.23 Forced Dec 1 Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [1.000m/s2] F3.24 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 1
Range: 0 ~ 100.0% (rated speed) [97.0%]
F3.25 Forced Dec 2 Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [0.900m/s2] F3.26 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 2
Range: 0 ~ 100.0% (rated speed) [97.0%]
F3.27 Forced Dec 3 Range: 0.020 ~ 9.999m/s2 [0.700m/s2] F3.28 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 3
Range: 0 ~ 100.0% (rated speed) [97.0%]
F3.23 ~ F3.28 are valid only when the forced Dec switch input is selected through F7.02 (Feedback Input Selection). They are used to set the triggering points and Dec rates of three pairs of forced Dec switches.
A low speed elevator may have only 1 pair of forced Dec switches, but a high speed elevator may have 2 or 3 pairs to
ensure the normal Dec. Figure 6-25 shows the case when there are 3 pairs of forced Dec switches in the tunnel.
Down forceddeceleration switch
Bottom floorShaft bottom
space
Down forceddecelerationswitch 1
Contact board
Top floorShaft top space
Up forceddeceleration switch
Down forceddecelerationswitch 2
Down forceddecelerationswitch 3 Contact board
Up forceddecelerationswitch 3
Up forceddecelerationswitch 1Up forceddecelerationswitch 2
Car
Car
Figure 6-25 3-pair of forced Dec switches
The following exemplifies the forced Dec process with a climbing elevator that has 3 pairs of Dec switches (the down Dec process is the same as the up Dec process):
When the elevator runs close to switch 3, the elevator speed is detected. If the speed is faster than the Triggering Point of Forced Dec 3, the elevator will be forced to decelerate according to F3.27.
The elevator then keeps climbing. When it runs close to switch 2, if the speed is detected to be slower than the Triggering Point of Forced Dec 2, it will still decelerate according to Forced Dec 3 (F3.27); otherwise it will decelerate according to Forced Dec 2 (F3.25).
The elevator then keeps climbing. When it runs close to switch 1, if the speed is detected to be slower than the Triggering Point of Forced Dec 1, its Dec rate will not change; otherwise it will decelerate according to Forced Dec 1 (F3.23) till the creeping speed (F3.20) and stop then. See Figure 6-26.
Rated speed (F0.05)
V
Forced Dec.3 speed detect
(F3.28×F0.05)
Creeping speed (F3.20)
Ordinaryrunning curve
Up forced Dec. switch 2
Ordinary Dec. point t
Forced Dec.2 speed detect(F3.26×F0.05)
Forced Dec.1 speed detect(F3.24×F0.05)
Up forced Dec. switch 3
Up forced Dec. switch 1
Forced Dec.curve
Forced Dec. speed 3 (F3.27)
Forced Dec. speed 2 (F3.25)
Forced Dec. speed 1 (F3.23)
Figure 6-26 Forced Dec
Note 1. The 3 triggering points should follow the descending order from point 3 to point1, while the Dec rates should follow the ascending order from Dec 3 to Dec 1. 2. When forced Dec. 1 input is set valid, the present floor will be reset to be the highest/lowest floor after the elevator passes the UP/DOWN forced Dec. switch 1 and after a leveling signal. This function can be used in the reset running after floor signal is lost.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 55
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
6.5 Distance Control (F4.00 ~ F4.57)
F4.00 Floor Number Range: 2 ~ 50 [15] Setting the total floor number, cluding the basement.
For example, for a building with 2 floors underground and 20 above the ground, set F4.00 to 22.
Note The total floor number must be set correctly before the auto-learn running. F4.01 Max. Floor Height Range: 0 ~ 30.00m
Setting the maximum floor height.
In the auto-learn running, this height serves as the criterion for pulse overflow. The frequency division rate is also calculated based on it. See the description of F4.08.
Note As a means of protection, the max. floor height does not affect the precision of the autolearning process. Do not bother about the exact number. F4.02 Max. Speed of Curve 1 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0]F4.03 Max. Speed of Curve 2 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0]F4.04 Max. Speed of Curve 3 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0]F4.05 Max. Speed of Curve 4 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0]F4.06 Max. Speed of Curve 5 Range: 0 ~ F0.05 (rated speed) [0] Setting the running curve in the distance control mode.
At most 6 curves can be set in the distance control mode: F4.02 ~ F4.06 and F0.05. By default, F0.05 represents the highest speed. The curve of distance control running is shown in Figure 6-27.
S4S3
S2S1 (shaded area)
V MAX6=F0.05
V62 V MAX5
V MAX4
V MAX3
V MAX2
V MAX1
V52
V42
V32
V22
V12
S6DEC
S6S5
S5DEC
S4DEC
S3DEC
S2DECS1DEC
V
t
Figure 6-27 Distance control running curve
The parameters in Figure 6-27 are explained below:
V12 ~ V62: the second inflecxion of curve 1 ~ curve 6 (the start speed of end acceleration jerk in S curve).
VMAX1 ~ VMAX6: the highest speed of curve 1 ~ curve 6
S1 ~ S6: the shorted running distance of curve 1 ~ curve 6.
S1DEC ~ S6DEC: the deceleration distance of curve 1 ~ curve 6.
In distance control running, the drive will choose the fittest curve out of the 6 according to the actual running distance. By realtime detecting the distance to the leveling position of destination floor, the drive will output speed in terms of distance control principle, i.e., the running speed is the function of distance.
For detailed distance control running, see Chapter 7 Application.
Note 1. To set the speed curve, set the lowest speed F4.02 and rated speed F0.05 first, then set the other four curves with fixed incremental step. 2. To set the lowest speed, ensure that when standby parameter Curve Min. Running Distance is displayed (F9.02 = 13), the reading of the lowest speed corresponds to a min. running distance that is not bigger than the min. floor height. 3. The optimal curve criterion: the time that elevator runs at constant speed after reaching the highest speed is the shortest. F4.07 Leveling Distance Range: 0 ~ 500mm
The leveling distance is the space an elevator travels when the leveling signal is valid.
This function can be used to adjust the creeping distance in the distance control. F4.08 Floor Height Frequency Division Rate
Range: 1 ~ 60000 [*]
To avoid pulse overflow during autolearning, the drive figures out the floor height frequency division rate according to the max. floor height, PG pulse number and traction machine mechanical parameters.
This parameter is calculated by the drive. You cannot change it.
Note To avoid pulse overflow during the floor height autolearning, which will be reported as E033 at keypad LED, ensure that F1.00, F1.07 and F4.01 are consistent with their actual values. F4.09 Floor Height 1 Range: 0 ~ 50000 [0] F4.10 Floor Height 2 Range: 0 ~ 50000 [0] : : : : F4.57 Floor Height 49 Range: 0 ~ 50000 [0]
The function codes in the above list record the floor-height pulse number divided by F4.08.
F4.09 ~ F4.57 values are created during autolearning. You can change them according to the actual situation.
The values of F4.09 ~ F4.57 are related to F4.00 (Floor Number). After the autolearning, the height of the valid number of floors (set through F4.00) will be recorded, while the rest of floor height function codes will be cleared.
For example: If F4.00 = 10 (10 floors, 9 floor heights), after the autolearning, the height of floors 1 to floors 9 (F4.09 ~ F4.17) will be recorded, while invalid F4.18 ~ F4.57 will be cleared.
56 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
6.6 Digital I/O (F5.00 ~ F5.40)
F5.00 X1 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [34] F5.01 X2 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [35] F5.02 X3 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [38] F5.03 X4 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [39] F5.04 X5 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [15] F5.05 X6 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [8] F5.06 X7 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [9] F5.07 X8 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [10] F5.08 X9 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [12] F5.09 X10 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [14] F5.10 X11 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [22] F5.11 X12 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [23] F5.12 X13 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [24] F5.13 X14 Terminal Function Range: 0 ~ 43 [25]
X1 ~ X14 are terminals for programmable digital input. Their functions can be set to anything as listed in Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 Function list
Setting Function 0 Disable 1 Floor instruction 1 (F1) 2 Floor instruction 2 (F2) 3 Floor instruction 3 (F3)) 4 Floor instruction 4 (F4) 5 Floor instruction 5 (F5) 6 Floor instruction 6 (F6) 7 Floor initialization (INI) 8 MS speed terminal 1 9 MS speed terminal 2 10 MS speed terminal 3 11 Up forced Dec 1 input, normally open (2LS1) 12 Up forced Dec 1 input, normally closed (2LS2) 13 Down forced Dec 1 input, normally open (1LS1) 14 Down forced Dec 1 input, normally closed (1LS2) 15 Distance control enable (DCE) 16 External fault input, normally open (EXT1) 17 External fault input, normally closed (EXT2) 18 External reset command input (RESET) 19 Battery driven running (BAT) 20 Brake feedback input, normally open (BSM1) 21 Brake feedback input, normally closed (BSM2) 22 Digital weight signal 1 (WD1) 23 Digital weight signal 2 (WD2) 24 Digital weight signal 3 (WD3) 25 Digital weight signal 4 (WD4) 26 UP forced Dec 2 input, normally open (4LS1) 27 UP forced Dec 2 input, normally closed (4LS2) 28 Down forced Dec 2 input, normally open (3LS1) 29 Down forced Dec 2 input, normally closed (3LS2) 30 Up forced Dec 3 input, normally open (6LS1) 31 Up forced Dec 3 input, normally closed (6LS2) 32 Down forced Dec 3 input, normally open (5LS1) 33 Down forced Dec 3 input, normally closed (5LS2) 34 Drive enable (ENA)
Setting Function 35 Floor auto-learn (SL) 36 Contactor feedback normally open input (CSM1) 37 Contactor feedback normally closed input (CSM2) 38 Inspection running (INS) 39 Stop request (REQ) 40 Floor setting (FLE)
41, 42 Reserved 43 Programmable logic (PXi, i 4)
The functions listed in Table 6-7 are described below:
1~6: Floor instruction (F1 ~ F6)
The floor instruction is used in the distance control with given floor number.
EV3100 drive can set at most 6 floor-indication input terminals: F1 ~ F6. The 6 inputs can be used together in binary system to indicate different floors, F1 being the lower bit and F6 being the higher bit.
In actual situation, you can determine the number of terminals according to the total floor number.
Example 1: a 20-floor building.
In this case, you can select X1 ~ X5 as the input terminals of floor instruction by setting F5.00=1, F5.01=2, F5.02=3, F5.03=4 and F5.04=5.
The 5 terminals can specify at most 31 floors (11111B = 31).
Example 2: a 15-floor building.
In this case, you can select X1 ~ X4 as the input terminals of floor instruction by setting F5.00=1, F5.01=2, F5.02=3 and F5.03=4.
The 4 terminals can specify at most 15 floors (1111B = 15).
Note 1. EV3100 drives allow at most 50 floors, corresponding to the binary code of 110010B. 2. When the combination of F6 ~ F1 is 0, it means nothing. 3. Note that no matter whether there are underground floors or not, the drive regards floor 1 as the lowest floor, corresponding to the binary code of 000001B. 7: Floor initialization (INI)
When the floor number set at the drive is different from the actual number, you need to initialize it.
When terminal INI-COM is ON, and both the up/down leveling signals are valid, the present floor of the drive will be initialized to be the floor indicated by the floor instruction after the drive is stopped.
The time sequence of command INI is shown below:
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 57
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
INI
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
T T≥ 12ms
ON
ON
ON
ON
Figure 6-28 Time sequence of INI
As shown in Figure 6-28, when the elevator runs to the position where UP/DOWN leveling signal is valid and stops, the present floor is reset to 21 (010101B=21).
8~10: MS speed selection (MS1 ~ MS3)
MS1 ~ MS3 are used to select MS speeds.
At most 8 speeds can be set through the combination of these terminals. For details, see the description of F3.03 ~ F3.10.
11~12: Up forced Dec 1 input (2LS1 ~ 2LS2)
This function is related to the first up forced-Dec signal, used to slow down the climbing elevator.
This function is realized in 2 ways: normally open contactor (2LS1) and normally closed contactor (2LS2).
If X9 is set as the up forced-Dec input 1 terminal, normally open (F5.08=11), the wiring is as shown below.
X9
COM
EV3100
Figure 6-29 Up forced-Dec input, normally open
If X9 is set as the up forced-Dec 1 input terminal, normally closed (F5.08=12), the wiring is as shown below:
X9
COM
EV3100
Figure 6-30 Up forced-Dec input, normally closed
For the application of up forced-Dec 1 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
13~14:Down forced-Dec 1 input (1LS1 ~ 1LS2)
This function is related to the first down forced-Dec signal, used to slow down the plunging elevator.
This function is realized in 2 ways: normally open contactor (1LS1) and normally closed contactor (1LS2).
The wirings are the same as those of the up forced-Dec 1. See Figure 6-29 and Figure 6-30.
For the application of down forced-Dec 1 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
15: Distance control enable (DCE)
The DCE terminal is used in the distance control with given stop request.
For the application of distance control, see Chapter 7 Application.
In communication control mode, see Appendix 2 Communication Protocol for the way to select Stop-request distance control.
Note To select the distance control with given stop request, ensure that: 1) Operation Mode is set to terminal speed control, i.e., F0.02 = 2. 2) MS speed 0 is set to 0, i.e., F3.03=0. 3) DCE is ON. 16~17: External fault input (EXT1 ~ EXT2) The fault signal of external equipment can be input through this terminal, so that drive can monitor that equipment and respond accordingly. When the drive receives the EXT signal, E015 (external equipment faulty) will be displayed.
The external faults can be input through normally open contactor (EXT1) or normally closed contactor (EXT2).
For the wiring of contactors, see Figure 6-29 and Figure 6-30.
18: External reset command input (RESET) The function of RST terminal is the same as the RESET key on the keypad.
Upon drive fault alarms, you can reset the fault by switching RST-COM from OFF to ON. After the reset, keep the RST-COM OFF.
19: Battery driven running (BAT) The BAT terminal is used to select the battery driven running mode.
For details, see Chapter 7 Application.
20~21: Brake feedback input (BSM1 ~ BSM2)
The brake action signal can be input through this terminal for the purpose of monitoring. If brake action goes wrong, the drive will raise fault alarm and display E035 (CR/BR fault).
The brake feedback can be input through normally open contact (BSM1) or normally closed contact (BSM2).
22~25: Digital weight signal (WD1 ~ WD4)
Input through this terminal is the digital weight signal, based on which the drive sets the torque bias and starts the lift stably.
58 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Select among WD1 ~ WD4 according to the actual number of weighing devices and set the load of switches based on the setting of F2.09 ~ F2.12.
For example: An elevator uses 3 weighing devices. Their loads are 10%, 50% and 80% respectively.
Suppose that:
1. F5.10=22; F5.11=23; F5.12=24;
2. F2.09=10%; F2.10=50%; F2.11=80%
In this way, X11 represents the 10% weighing device, X12, the 50%, and X13, the 80%.
For the application of digital weight signal, see the description of F2.09 ~ F2.12.
26~27: Up forced Dec 2 input (4LS1 ~ 4LS2)
Corresponding to the elevator’s second pair of up forced Dec signal.
The signal can be input through a normally open contact (4LS1) or a normally closed contact (4LS2).
For the application of up forced Dec 2 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
28~29: Down forced Dec 2 input (3LS1 ~ 3LS2)
Corresponding to the elevator’s second pair of down forced Dec signal.
The signal can be input through a normally open contact (3LS1) or a normally closed contact (3LS2).
For the application of down forced Dec 2 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
30~31: UP forced Dec 3 input (6LS1 ~ 6LS2)
Corresponding to the elevator’s third pair of up forced Dec signal.
The signal can be input through a normally open contact (6LS1) or a normally closed contact (6LS2).
For the application of up forced Dec 3 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
32~33: Down forced Dec 3 input (5LS1 ~ 5LS2)
Corresponding to the elevator’s third pair of down forced Dec signal.
The signal can be input through a normally open contact (5LS1) or a normally closed contact (5LS2).
For the application of down forced Dec 3 input, see the description of F3.23 ~ F3.28.
34: Drive enable (ENA)
When this signal is selected, ENA must be enabled before the drive can run. If this signal is not selected, the drive is enabled by default.
In the actual application, ENA signal can be connected to the elevator’s safety circuit.
35: Floor auto-learn (SL)
SL terminal is used in the floor height autolearning.
When this signal and FWD command are valid, the drive will start floor height autolearning, recording the floor heights according to the pulse feedback and leveling signals and store them in F4.09 ~ F4.57.
For the application of floor autolearning terminal, see section 7.2.4 Auto-learn Running.
36~37: Contactor feedback input (CSM1 ~ CSM2)
Input through this terminal is the act signal of the contactor at output side. Any wrong act of that contactor will trigger the alarm displayed as ‘E035’ (CR/BR faulty).
The contactor feedback can be input through a normally open contact (CSM1) or a normally closed contact (CSM2).
38: Inspection running (INS)
INS terminal is used during the inspection running.
This signal, when used together with FWD or REV command, can control the elevator to go FWD/REV during inspection.
For the detailed usage of the INS terminal, see 7.2.6 Inspection Running.
39: Stop request (REQ)
REQ terminal is used in the distance control with given stop request.
In the distance control with given stop request, when this signal is invalid, the drive runs fast; when this signal is invalid, the drive starts Dec to stop according to the distance.
For detailed usage of the REQ terminal, see 7.2.2 Distance Control Running With Given Stop Request.
40: Floor setting (FLE)
FLE terminal is used in the distance control with given floor number. When FLE signal is valid, the drive will accept the floor signal set through F1 ~ F6.
The time sequence of FLE command is shown in Figure 6-31.
FLE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
T T≥ 12ms
ON
ON
ON
ON
Figure 6-31 Time sequence of FLE command
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 59
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
43: Programmable logic input (PXi) A normal digital input terminal can be defined as a programmable logic input terminal.
The difference between a programmable logic input terminal and a normal digital input terminal is that the later can be used to define only one definite terminal function, either MS1, or BAT, or INS. However, through combination with other programmable logic input terminals, the programmable logic inputs can be used to define different functions.
Note 1. The programmable logic input function is useful when the controller cannot provide standard drive control contact signal. It can translate the non-standard control signal into standard control signal required by the drive. 2. The number of programmable logic input terminal is optional. You can define at most 4 digital input terminals as the programmable logic input terminal, in which situation there can be 16 possible logical combinations (from 0000B to 1111B). 3. When closed, the programmable logic input terminal’s vlaue is 1; open, 0. The 4 terminals have 16 logical combinations, corresponding to function codes F5.14 ~ F5.29. The value of the function codes are determined by the logical combinations of 10 control commands (such as stop request, inspection and distance control). F5.14 Logic 0000 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.15 Logic 0001 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.16 Logic 0010 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.17 Logic 0011 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.18 Logic 0100 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.19 Logic 0101 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.20 Logic 0110 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.21 Logic 0111 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.22 Logic 1000 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.23 Logic 1001 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.24 Logic 1010 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.25 Logic 1011 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.26 Logic 1100 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.27 Logic 1101 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.28 Logic 1110 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024] F5.29 Logic 1111 Range: 0 ~ 1023, 1024 [1024]
Function codes F5.14 ~ F5.29 are valid only when you select the programmable logic input function.
Function code value
Function codes F5.14 ~ F5.29 are used to define the elevator’s operation status. The function code value is determined by the logic combination of ten control commands: Stop request, Inspection running, Distance
control, Autolearning, Battery-driven running, MS speed 1 ~ 3, FWD, REV. These ten commands correspond to ten binary bits. The command is valid when that bit is one, or invalid when zero. Convert the ten-bit binary figure into decimal to determine the code value.
The max. value of a ten-bit binary figure is 1111111111B, or decimal 1023. To invalidate a certain logic function, just set its function code value to 1024.
Shown in the figure below are the commands corresponding to each binary bit.
0123456789101112131415
INS (inspection)REQ (stop request)
SL (self-learning)
MS2
DCE(distance control)
REV (DOWN)
BAT (battery driven mode)MS3
Reserved
FWD (UP)
MS1
How to determine a function code value
1. Determine the binary figure based on the actual need.
For example: to define logic “0000” as MS speed 7, FWD, the corresponding binary bits should be set like this: BIT15 ~ BIT10
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Reserved FWD REV MS1 MS2 MS3 BAT SL DCE INS REQ0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
2. Convert the binary into decimal:
biti $ 2 i
Where, “i” is 0 ~ 9.
Convert the above binary figure “1011100000” into decimal:
1 % 25 + 1 % 26 +1 % 27 +1 % 29 = 736
In this way we get the value of F5.14: 736.
Combination of logic input terminals
Example 1. X11, X12, X13 and X14 as logic input terminals
1) Set X11 ~ X14 as programmable logic input terminals PX1 ~ PX4: set F5.10, F5.11, F5.12 and F5.13 to “43”.
2) See Table 6-8 for the correspondence between the input combinations of PX1 ~ PX4 and logic functions:
Table 6-8 Programmable logic input vs. function selection, 1
Terminal PX4 Terminal PX3 Terminal PX2 Terminal PX1 Corresponding logic function OFF OFF OFF OFF Logic 0000 (Function code F5.14) OFF OFF OFF ON Logic 0001 (Function code F5.15 ) OFF OFF ON OFF Logic 0010 (Function code F5.16 ) OFF OFF ON ON Logic 0011 (Function code F5.17)
60 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Terminal PX4 Terminal PX3 Terminal PX2 Terminal PX1 Corresponding logic function OFF ON OFF OFF Logic 0100 (Function code F5.18) OFF ON OFF ON Logic 0101 (Function code F5.19) OFF ON ON OFF Logic 0110 (Function code F5.20) OFF ON ON ON Logic 0111 (Function code F5.21) ON OFF OFF OFF Logic 1000 (Function code F5.22) ON OFF OFF ON Logic 1001 (Function code F5.23) ON OFF ON OFF Logic 1010 (Function code F5.24) ON OFF ON ON Logic 1011 (Function code F5.25) ON ON OFF OFF Logic 1100 (Function code F5.26) ON ON OFF ON Logic 1101 (Function code F5.27) ON ON ON OFF Logic 1110 (Function code F5.28) ON ON ON ON Logic 1111 (Function code F5.29)
Exapmle 2. X11, X12 and X13 as logic input terminals.
1) Set X11 ~ X13 as programmable logic input terminals PX1 ~ PX3: set F5.10, F5.11 and F5.12 to ”43”.
2) See Table 6-9 for the correspondence between the input combinations of PX1 ~ PX3 and logic functions.
Table 6-9 Programmable logic input vs. function selection, 2
Terminal PX3 Terminal PX2 Terminal PX1 Corresponding logic function
OFF OFF OFF Logic 0000 (Function code F5.14) Logic 1000 (Function code F5.22)
OFF OFF ON Logic 0001 (Function code F5.15) Logic 1001 (Function code F5.23)
OFF ON OFF Logic 0010 (Function code F5.16) Logic 1010 (Function code F5.24)
OFF ON ON Logic 0011 (Function code F5.17) Logic 1011 (Function code F5.25)
ON OFF OFF Logic 0100 (Function code F5.18) Logic 1100 (Function code F5.26)
ON OFF ON Logic 0101 (Function code F5.19) Logic 1101 (Function code F5.27)
ON ON OFF Logic 0110 (Function code F5.20) Logic 1110 (Function code F5.28)
ON ON ON Logic 0111 (Function code F5.21) Logic 1111 (Function code F5.29)
In Table 6-9, one logic input combination corresponds to two logic functions, that means one function must be defined as invalid. For example, when PX3, PX2 and PX1 are OFF, OFF and OFF, if F5.22 is set to 1024, logic “0000” is the valid function, and its function code F5.14 can be set from 0 to 1023.
Example 3. X11 and X12 as the logic input terminals
1) Set X11 and X12 as the programmable logic input terminal PX1, PX2: set F5.10 and F5.11 to “43”
2) See Table 6-10 for the correspondence between the input combinations of PX1, PX2 and logic functions.
Table 6-10 Programmable logic input vs. function selection, 3
Terminal PX2 Terminal PX1 Corresponding logic function
OFF OFF
Logic 0000 (Function code F5.14) Logic 1000 (Function code F5.22) Logic 0100 (Function code F5.18) Logic 1100 (Function code F5.26)
OFF ON
Logic 0001 (Function code F5.15) Logic 1001 (Function code F5.23) Logic 0101 (Function code F5.19) Logic 1101 (Function code F5.27)
ON OFF
Logic 0010 (Function code F5.16) Logic 1010 (Function code F5.24) Logic 0110 (Function code F5.20) Logic 1110 (Function code F5.28)
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 61
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
ON ON
Logic 0011 (Function code F5.17) Logic 1011 (Function code F5.25) Logic 0111 (Function code F5.21) Logic 1111 (Function code F5.29)
In Table 6-10, one logic input combination corresponds to four logic functions, which means three of them should be defined as invalid. For example, when PX2 and PX1 are OFF and OFF, if F5.18, F5.22 and F5.26 are all set to “1024”, logic “0000” is then the valid function, and its function code F5.14 can be set from 0 to 1023.
Example 4. X11 as the logic input terminal
1) Set X11 as the programmable logic input terminal PX1: set F5.10 to “34”.
2) See Table 6-11 for the correspondence between the input combinations of PX1 and logic functions.
Table 6-11 Programmable logic input vs. func. selection, 4
Terminal PX1 Corresponding logic function
OFF
Logic 0000 (Function code F5.14) Logic 1000 (Function code F5.22) Logic 0010 (Function code F5.16) Logic 1010 (Function code F5.24) Logic 0100 (Function code F5.18) Logic 1100 (Function code F5.26) Logic 0110 (Function code F5.20) Logic 1110 (Function code F5.28)
ON
Logic 0001 (Function code F5.15) Logic 1001 (Function code F5.23) Logic 0011 (Function code F5.17) Logic 1011 (Function code F5.25) Logic 0101 (Function code F5.19) Logic 1101 (Function code F5.27) Logic 0111 (Function code F5.21) Logic 1111 (Function code F5.29)
In Table 6-11, one logic input combination corresponds to eight logic functions, which means that seven of them should be defined as invalid. For example, when PX1 is set to OFF, if F5.16, F5.18, F5.20, F5.22, F5.24, F5.26 and F5.28 are set to 1024, logic “0000” is then valid, and its function code can be set from 0 to 1023. F5.30 Y1 function selection Range: 0 ~ 20 [1] F5.31 Y2 function selection Range: 0 ~ 20 [14] F5.32 CR function selection Range: 0 ~ 20 [19] F5.33 BR function selection Range: 0 ~ 20 [18] F5.34 TR function selection Range: 0 ~ 20 [20]
Y1, Y2, CR, BR and TR are programmable output terminals, where terminals Y1 and Y2 are open collector transistor output, while terminals CR, BR and TR are relay contact output, whose function can be set to any value listed in Table 6-12.
Table 6-12 Programmable output functions
Value Function 0 Drive ready
Value Function 1 Running 2 Accelerating 3 Decelerating 4 Zero speed running 5 Autolearning 6 Passing Dec point 7 Stop elevator 8 Door pre-opening output 9 Frequency detected signal 1 (FDT1) 10 Frequency detected signal 2 (FDT2) 11 FWD 12 REV 13 Speed reached signal 14 Zero speed signal 15 Reserved 16 Drive pre-alarm 17 Output prohibited 18 Brake control 19 Output contactor control 20 Fault output
The functions listed in Table 6-12 are described below:
0: Drive Ready
1) When F0.02 = 0:
signal ON will be output if drive is normal and bus voltage has set up.
2) When F0.02 = 1, 2, 3:
signal ON will be output if terminal ENA is valid, the drive is normal and bus voltage has set up.
3) When F0.02 = 4, 5:
signal ON will be output if terminal ENA is valid, the enable bit of the communication control is valid, drive is normal and bus voltage has set up.
1: Running
Signal ON will be output when the drive is running.
2: Accelerating
Signal ON will be output when the drive is accelerating.
See Fig.6-32.
62 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Time
Speed
Running command ON
ON ON
ON
ON
Zero speed
Accelerating
Decelerating ON
Figure 6-32 Running state output 1
3: Decelerating
Signal ON will be output when the drive is decelerating.
See Fig.6-32.
4: Zero speed running
Signal ON will be output when the drive runs at zero speed.
See Fig.6-32.
5: Autolearning
Signal ON will be output when the drive is autolearning.
6: Passing Dec. point
When an elevator runs in STOP-request distance control mode, the drive will output a 200ms pulse before passing the Dec. point of each floor. The pulse width also depends on F5.36. For details, see the description of F5.36.
7: Elevator stop
When the elevator stops, the drive will power off and output an 2s pulse. The control board will disable the running command according to this signal.
See Fig.6-33.
Time
Running speed
Drive on
ON
ON
Running command
2S
ON
Elevator stop
Figure 6-33 Running state output 2
8: Door pre-opening output
Signal ON will be output under the following conditions:
1) Not in keypad control, inspection running, autolearning or battery driven running mode
2) Elevator being at the door zone
3) Speed <0.1m/s
4) Decelerating
9: Frequency detected signal 1 (FDT1)
See the description of F5.37.
10: Frequency detected signal 2 (FDT2)
See the description of F5.38.
11: FWD
Signal ON will be output when the elevator is running upward.
12: REV
Signal ON will be output when the elevator is running downward.
13: Speed reached signal
See the description of F5.40.
14: Zero speed signal
Signal ON will be output when the drive output speed becomes zero.
16: Drive pre-alarm
A pre-alarm siganl will be output when certain drive faults (E007, E011, E013, E014) are detected.
E007: Control power over-voltage. When the control power voltage is detected higher than the preset point, a pre-alarm signal will be output 10s before outputting the fault signal.
E011: Power module over-heated. When the power module is detected higher than 80°C, the drive will output the pre-alarm signal.
E013/E014: Drive/motor overloaded. When the output current is detected higher than the preset point, a pre-alarm signal will be output 10s before outputting the fault signal.
Note The pre-alarm function can inform external controller of the possible drive faults, so that the drive can be stopped in time to avoid damage. 17: Output prohibited
This function prohibits the output of the corresponding output terminal.
18: Brake control
This function is used to control braking.
19: Output contactor control
This function is used to open/close the output contactors.
20: Fault output
The output is valid when the drive is faulty. F5.35 Action Mode Select Range: 0 ~ 15 [0]
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 63
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Select whether the programmable outputs Y1, Y2, CR and BR act at ON or OFF signal.
F5.35 defines the action mode for four programmable outputs. The selection of each action mode is controlled by a one-bit binary code. The figure below shows the signals corresponding to every binary bit.
0123
Y2 (open collector output 2)
Y1 (open collector output 1)
BR (brake controlling relay)
CR (contactor controlling relay)
Table 6-13 shows the action modes corresponding to every bit.
Table 6-13 Programmable output action modes
F5.35 Setting Action mode 0 Y1 outputs ON at ON signal and OFF at OFF signal.
bit0 1 Y1 outputs ON at OFF signal and OFF at ON signal. 0 Y2 outputs ON at ON signal and OFF at OFF signal.
bit1 1 Y2 outputs ON at OFF signal and OFF at ON signal. 0 CR outputs ON at ON signal and OFF at OFF signal.
bit2 1 CR outputs ON at OFF signal and OFF at ON signal.0 BR outputs ON at ON signal and OFF at OFF signal.
bit3 1 BR outputs ON at OFF signal and OFF at ON signal.
Setting F5.35 requires converting the binary into decimal. See the description of F5.14 ~ F5.29. F5.36 Dec Point Output Adjust Range: 0.050 ~ 2.000s [0.250s]
F5.36 is a complementary function of function No.6 in Table 6-12. It is to set a lead time for outputting Dec point signal, which allows engough time for the controller to decide whether to stop at the coming floor.
See Figure 6-34 for the time sequence of Dec. point passing signals.
Floor2 Floor 3 Floor 4 Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7Floor 1
Time
Position
Speed
F5.36
200ms
F5.36 F5.36 F5.36 F5.36 F5.36
Dec. point passing signal
F2 Dec.pointpassing
F3 Dec.pointpassing
F4 Dec.pointpassing
F5 Dec.pointpassing
F6Dec.pointpassing
F7 Dec.pointpassing
Figure 6-34 Dec. point passing signals time seq.
For the application of Dec. point passing signals, see Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance.
Note 1. F5.36 should not be set too big, or the neighbouring two Dec. point passing signals will be too close to identify, and the pulse number will seem less. 2. The pulse width of the Dec. point passing signal is related to F5.36, but will not exceed 200ms. When F5.36 is set less than
200ms, the pulse width of Dec. point passing signal will also be smaller than 200ms. 3. When the curve speed cannot reach the rated elevator speed, like the curve at floor 2 or floor 3 in Figure 6-34, the Dec. point is also the second inflexion of the Acc. section. When curve speed reaches the rated elevator speed, like the curve at floor 4, 5, 6 or 7, the Dec. point is the inflexion from rated speed to Dec. section. F5.37 Frequency Detected Signal 1 (FDT1) Level
Range: 0 ~ 100.0% (Elevator Rated Speed) [10.0%]
F5.38 Frequency Detected Signal 2 (FDT2) Level
Range: 0 ~ 100.0% (Elevator Rated Speed) [95.0%]
F5.39 FDT Signal (Lag) Range: 0 ~ 10.0% (Elevator Rated Speed) [1.0%]
F5.37 and F5.39 are supplements of the No.9 function in Table 6-12, while F5.38 and F5.39 are supplements of No.10 function in Table 6-12.
When the speed is lower than a preset speed, Y will output a signal. The reference speed is called FDT level.
During acceleration, if the speed rises higher than FDT level, Y will keep outputting this signal until the speed is greater than the frequency of FDT level plus FDT signal delay. See Figure 6-35.
FDT signal delay
Time
Time
Y(FDT signal)
FDT level
Speed
ON ONOFF
Figure 6-35 FDT level vs. FDT signal
F5.40 Speed Detect Range Range: 0 ~ 20.0% (rated elevator speed) [5.0%]
F5.40 is a complementary function of function No.13 in Table 6-12. When the speed reaches the speed detect range, speed limit signal will be output. See Fig.6-36.
Speed detectionrange (F5.40)
Time
Time
Y(speed limitsignal)
Speedsetting
Elevator speed
ONOFF
Time
Time
Speedsetting
Elevator speed
ON OFFY
(speed limitsignal)
Speed detectionrange (F5.40)
OFFOFF
Figure 6-36 Speed detect range
6.7 Analog I/O (F6.00 ~ F6.06)
F6.00 AI1 filter time constant Range: 0.002 ~ 5.000s [0.100s]
F6.01 AI2 filter time constant Range: 0.002 ~ 5.000s [0.010s]
64 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
These two function codes are to set filter time constant of analog input signal.
The drive will filter the analog voltage/current signal input from AI1-GND and AI2-GND to eliminate interfering signal. However, too long filter time will affect adjustment sensibility. F6.02 AO1 function select Range: 0 ~ 8 [0] F6.03 AO2 function select Range: 0 ~ 9 [2]
The two analog output terminals AO1 and AO2 can output 0V ~ 10V voltage signal to realize 10 monitoring functions.
See the following table for the value of F6.02 and F6.03 and their output functions.
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 65
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Table 6-14 Analog output signal selection
Setting Parameter Signal definition
0 Speed 0 ~ 10V = -100% ~ +100% (elevator rated speed)
1 Preset speed 0 ~ 10V = -100% ~ +100% (elevator rated speed)
2 Output current 0 ~ 10V = 0 ~ 2 times of rated current 3 Output voltage 0 ~ 10V = 0 ~ 1.2 times of rated voltage
4 AI1 preset input AI1 input voltage signal: 0 ~ 10V AI1 input current signal: 0 ~ 20mA = 0 ~ 10V
5 AI2 preset input 0 ~ 10V 6 Output torque 0 ~ 10V = 0 ~ 2 times of rated torque
7 Torque bias balance adjust
0 ~ 10V = –100% ~ +100% (drive rated torque)
8 Torque bias gain adjust
0 ~ 10V = –200% ~ +200% (driverated torque)
9 Speed difference
0 ~ 10V = –10 ~ +10Hz
F6.04 Analog input select Range: 0, 1 [1]
F6.04 is to define the function of analog inputs AI1 and AI2.
0: AI1 speed signal, AI2 weight signal
1: AI1 weight signal, AI2 speed signal F6.05 AO1 zero bias adjust Range: -500mv ~ 500mv [0]F6.06 AO2 zero bias adjust Range: -500mv ~ 500mv [0]
F6.05 and F6.06 are to adjust the zero bias of AI1 and AI2.
When using F6.05 and F6.06, F9.02 (LED display in standby state) can be used to observe the adjustment result. Set F9.02 to 5/6, and adjust the zero bias of AI1/AI2 to make the analog input signal become zero. The LED in standby state will also display 0 then.
6.8 Optimal Option (F7.00 ~ F7.08)
F7.00 Brake release delay Range: 0 ~ 2.000s [0] F7.01 Brake close delay Range: 0 ~ 1.000s [0]
Brake release delay refers to the time interval from drive zero-speed running to outputting brake-release command. This function enables the drive to enter running state before the brake release, so as to alleviate the impact at start.
Brake close delay refers to the time interval from drive zero-speed running to outputting brake-close command. This function can decrease stop impact.
For the application of F7.00 and F7.01, see Chapter 7 Application Guidance.
Note When the brake is controlled by external controller, F7.02 is invalid, while F7.01 is still valid. You can set F7.01 to “0”. F7.02 Feedback signal select Range: 0 ~ 4095 [0]
This function code determines whether to use the digital input signals special for elevator. It also determines the input mode of leveling signal.
Bit0 ~ Bit6 and Bit10 ~ Bit11 of F7.02 determines whether to use the 8 elevator input signals: “1” for yes and “0” for no.
Bit9 of F7.02 can select the input mode of leveling signal: “0” for normally open input and “1” for normally closed input, as shown in the following figure.
0123456789101112131415
Brake feedbackContactor feedback
Up forced Dec.1 inputDown forced Dec.1 input1
Leveling signal type
Reserved
Up forced Dec. 2 inputDown forced Dec. 2 input
Up forced Dec. 3 inputDown forced Dec. 3 input
Reserved
Reserved
Setting F7.02 requires converting the selected binary code into a decimal figure. See the description of F5.14 ~ F5.29.
Note 1. A certain signal must be enabled through F7.02 before the corresponding signal can be input. 2. The multifunction terminal determines the type of contactor feedback input, brake feedback input and up/down forced Dec. digital input. See the description of F5.00 ~ F5.10 for details. F7.03 PG frequency division rate Range: 1 ~ 128 [4]
F7.03 can set frequency division rate with which the input pulse from the PG is divided into frequency divided pulse output. The situation when F7.03 is 4 is shown in Figure 6-37.
Phase Ainput
Phase Binput
OAoutput
OBoutput
PG pulseinput
Frequencydivisionoutput
Figure 6-37 Output waveform (F7.03 = 4)
F7.04 Start slope time Range: 0 ~ 2.000s [0]
The start slope time is the time it takes for an elevator to accelerate from zero speed to the rated speed. Please refer to the description of F3.00 ~ F3.01. F7.05 Fault Mask Range: 0 ~ 1023 [0]
F7.05 can screen part of drive faults.
F7.05 consists of 10 binary bits and can screen 10 faults: “0” for no screen and “1” for screen.
The 10 faults that can be screened are shown below:
66 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
012345678
Software overcurrent maskSoftware overvoltage maskInput side phase-failure (E008) maskOutput side phase-failure (E009) maskDrive overload (E013) maskMotor overload (E014) mask
Current detection fault (E019) maskBrake unit fault (E027) maskHeatsink overheated (E011) mask
9
SinCos PG phase CD disconnectiondetection (E025) mask
Setting F7.05 requires converting the selected binary code into a decimal figure. See the description of F5.14 ~ F5.29. F7.06 Fault auto-reset times Range: 0, 1 ~ 10 [0] F7.07 Fault reset interval Range: 2 ~ 20s [5s]
The drive, after stopping output upon fault during operation, will reset the fault after the time set through F7.07.
The number of auto-reset times is set through F7.06. When F7.06 is set to zero, there will be no auto-reset.
Note The following faults cannot be auto-reset: E016, E018, E019, E024, E028, E030, E032, E033, E035. F7.08 MS Inspection Select Range: 0, 1 ~ 7 [0]
To realize inspection running, you can define INS terminal, or define F7.08.
0: no MS inspection
1: inspect MS1
2: inspect MS2
3: inspect MS3
4: inspect MS4
5: inspect MS5
6: inspect MS6
7: inspect MS7
6.9 Communication Parameters
(F8.00 ~ F8.04)
EV3100 drives are configured with standard RS232 and RS485 serial communication ports and use open serial communication protocol.
1. To realize onsite host commissioning or monitoring, you can use the RS232 communication port. See Appendix 2 Communication Protocol.
2. To control the drive through communication, you can connect the drive to a PC or PLC through the RS485 port, or through a communication adapter. F8.00 Baudrate Select Range: 0 ~ 7 [0]
This parameter can set the data transmission rate during serial communication.
0: 1200BPS
1: 2400BPS
2: 4800BPS
3: 9600BPS
4: 19200BPS
5: 38400BPS
6: 115200BPS
7: 125000BPS F8.01 Data format Range: 0 ~ 5 [0]
F8.01 defines the data format used in serial communication protocol.
0: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity check.
1: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even check.
2: RTU, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd check.
3: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity check.
4: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, even check.
5: ASCII, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd check. F8.02 Local address Range: 0 ~ 247 [5]
The drive address used for communication with host computer.
The value “0” is the broadcast address. F8.03 Communication Time Out Delay
Range: 0, 0.1 ~ 100.0s [0]
This function is disabled when F0.03 is set to 0 ~ 3, or when F8.03 is zero.
When communication interruption is longer than the non-zero value of F8.03, the drive will display error code E017, and then turns off. F8.04 Communication Delay Time Range: 0 ~ 1.000s [0]
You can set the response delay in drive communication in order to adapt to the MODBUS host.
In RTU mode, the actual communication delay should be no less than 3.5 characters’ interval; in ASCII mode, 1ms.
6.10 Keypad Monitoring (F9.00 ~
F9.21) F9.00 LED displayed parameter 1 Range: 1 ~ 511 [55]
This function code defines the parameters displayed on LED when the elevator is running.
Through a 9-bit binary code, F9.00 controls 9 running state parameters. The display of each parameter is controlled by a binary bit, “1” for display, “0” for not display.
For exapmle, bit2 corresponds to the output current. When Bit2 is zero, no output current will be displayed. See the following figure for the parameter - bit relationship:
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 67
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
012345678
Running speed (m/s)
Output voltage (V)
Output current (A)
Output power (%)
Rotation speed (rpm)
Output frequency (Hz)
Preset speed (m/s)
Present floor
Present position (m)
Setting F9.00 requires converting the selected binary code into a decimal. See the description of F5.14 ~ F5.29.
The default value “55”, or “110111B”, and the corresponding binary code represents:
BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Present position Present floor Set speed Output frequency Rotation speed Output power Output current Output voltage Speed 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
Which means that running parameters that can be displayed include speed, output voltage,output current, rotation speed, output frequency.
Note 1. The parameters selected by F9.00 and F9.01 can all be displayed by using the key on the keypad. 2. Bit8 (present position) refers to the distance of elevator from leveling position of the bottom floor. The actual value is displayed only during and after autolearning, otherwise the reading is 0. F9.01 LED displayed parameter 2 Range: 0 ~ 511 [0]
F9.01 functions the same as F9.00. It is used to control the display the another 9 running state parameters. The binary code bits and parameters relationship is shown below:
012345678
DC bus voltage (V)
Torque bias gain adjust (V)
Input terminal block 1 state (HEX)Input terminal block 2 state (HEX)
Input terminal block 3 state (HEX)
Output terminal block state (HEX)
Analog input AI1 (V)
Analog input AI2 (V)
Pre-torque compensation (%)
Note 1. The result of Torque Bias Gain Adjustment is displayed as voltage. The display of 5V means the adjustment is completed. 2. The input terminal group state is displayed as a two-bit hexadecimal. When converted into binary, each bit stands for the ON or OFF state of a terminal: “1” for ON and “0” for OFF. The terminal groups and signal relationship is shown below: 1) Input terminal group 1 Including 8 terminal states. The relationship between binary bits and input terminals are shown below:
01234567
X1X2X3X4X5X6
UPLDWL
For example, the state of input terminal group 1 is displayed as 8E, the corresponding binary code is 10001110B, which means terminals DWL, X4, X3 and X2 are ON, the other 4 terminals are OFF. 2) Input terminal group 2 Including 8 terminal states. The relationship between binary bits and input terminals are shown below:
01234567
X7X8X9X10X11X12
UPLDWL
3) Input terminal group 3 Including 6 terminal states. The relationship between binary bits and input terminals are shown below:
01234567
X13X14FWDREV
Reserved
UPLDWL
3. The output terminal group state is displayed as a two-bit hexadecimal. When converted into binary, each bit stands for the ON or OFF state of a terminal: “1” for ON and “0” for OFF. Including 5 output terminals’ state, The relationship between binary bits and output terminals are shown below:
01234567
Y1Y2TRCRBR
Reserved
F9.02 LED display in standby state Range: 0 ~ 14 [0]
F9.02 specifies parameters displayed on LED when the drive is in standby state.
68 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
0: elevator rated speed (m/s)
1: input terminal group 1 state (HEX)
2: input terminal group 2 state (HEX)
3: input terminal group 3 state (HEX)
4: output terminal group state (HEX)
5: Analog input AI1 (V)
6: Analog input AI2 (V)
7: Torque bias balance adjust (V)
8: Dec. distance (m)
9: Pre-torque compensation (%)
10: Present floor
11: Present position (m)
12: DC bus voltage (V-AVE)
13: Curve min. running distance (m)
14: Set speed (m/s)
Note 1. All the standby parameters can be displayed in drive’s standby state by pressing the key. The setting of F9.02 determines LED default display. 2. The progress of torque bias balance adjustment will be shown on LED, when it comes to 5V, the adjustment is completed. 3. Dec distance is based on the elevator rated speed. It serves as a reference for installing forced Dec. switch. Make sure the forced Dec. switch installation distance is smaller than the Dec. distance. F9.03 Present floor Range: 1 ~ 50 [1]
F9.03 displays the present floor number of the elevator.
When the elevator stops, you may change this parameter through keypad or through communication with the host.
Note You can rectify F9.03 when it is not the actual floor number. It is recommended to do the change when the elevator is at a certain floor. Otherwise, the change needs to be confirmed to be correct or not after the elevator levels at a certain floor. F9.04 Running Times (High Digits) Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0]F9.05 Running Times (Low Digits) Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0]
F9.04 and F9.05 display the elevator running times.
The drive running times is counted once everytime it starts and stops.
Elevator running times is calculated through the following formula:
Running times = F9.04% 10000 + F9.05 For example, when F9.04 is set 10, and F9.05 is 1488,
Elevator running times = 10 × 10000 + 1488 = 101488 F9.06 Type of the 1st Fault F9.07 Type of the 2nd Fault F9.08 Type of the 3rd Fault F9.09 Running Speed at Last Fault (m/s) [*]
F9.10 Output Current at Last Fault (A) [*] F9.11 Bus Voltage at Last Fault (V) [*] F9.12 Input Terminal Group 1 State at Last Fault (HEX)[*] F9.13 Input Terminal Group 2 State at Last Fault (HEX) [*] F9.14 Input terminal group 3 state at last fault (HEX) [*] F9.15 Output Terminal Group State at Last Fault (HEX) [*]
EV3100 series drives can record the fault type of the last three faults. Stored in F9.08 is the type of the latest fault. Parameters including the running speed, output current, bus voltage and I/O terminal group states (F9.09 ~ F9.15) are available for your convenience.
See Chapter 8 for detailed description and handling methods of faults. F9.16 Temperature of Power Module (°C) [*]
F9.16 displays the present temperature of the power module. F9.17 Total Work Time (h) [*]
F9.17 displays in hour the total work time of the elevator. F9.18 Elevator present pulse position high digits [*] F9.19 Elevator present pulse position low digits [*]
F9.18 and F9.19 display the pulse number of the elevator at present position. The algorithm is the same as that of F9.04 and F9.05. F9.20 Control software version [*] F9.21 Keypad software version [*]
F9.20 and F9.21 displays the software version of EV3100 control board and keypad.
6.11 PG Function (FA.00 ~ FA.07)
FA.00 PG type Range: 0 ~ 3 [0] FA.00 defines the PG type that is actually used.
0: 12V incremental
1: 5V differential
2: UVW incremental
3: SinCos
Note 1. An PG interface is located at drive interface board and control board respectively. The former one is for asynchronous motor only, while the second one is suitable for both synchronous and asynchronous motors. 2. When 12V incremental PG for asynchronous motor is used, the 15-pin PG interface (CN7) on control board will be invalid. The pulse signal will be input through the interface board. FA.01 PG fault detection time Range: 0, 0.1 ~ 10.0s [0]
Chapter 6 Function Code Description 69
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
FA.01 specifies the time for detecting PG A/B/Z phase signal wire disconnection fault. No detection will be conducted when FA.01 is set to 0.
Note FA.01 is valid only in close-loop control. FA.02 PG reverse Range: 0, 1 [0]
0: same direction
1: reverse
If the wire connecting sequence of drive PG means the same direction as that of the drive-motor wire connection, you should set FA.02 to 0; otherwise, set it to 1.
In order to change the connection of any two phases of the motor, you can change this parameter rather than actually chaning the wire connection.
FA.03 Magnetic Pole Initial Angle Range: 0 ~ 359.9° FA.04 Phase C Magnitude Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0] FA.05 Phase C zero bias Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0] FA.06 Phase D magnitude Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0] FA.07 Phase D zero bias Range: 0 ~ 9999 [0]
FA.03 ~ FA.07 set the parameters of synchronous motors.
After the autotuning of a synchronous motor, the drive will note down the figures and store them in FA.03 ~ FA.07.
Note Autotune the synchronous motor twice to compare the magnetic pole initial angles (FA.03). The tuning result is right only when the difference is smaller than 10°, or is integer multiple of 360°/(pole pair number).
70 Chapter 6 Function Code Description
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
Introduction:
This chapter will guide you through the basic procedures of system design and function code configuration when the drive is applied in elevator system. Section 7.4 illustrates 3 typical applications for your reference.
7.1 Basic Procedures Of Elevator Application
When applying EV3100 drive to an elevator, refer to the following chart for basic procedures:
Start Applicationdemand analysis
Electricalconnection
diagram design
Onsiteinstallationand wiring
Power-onpreparation &
connection check
Commissioningand test
Parametersetting
Trial running ¶meter
adjust
Operation andmaintenanceEnd
Figure 7-1 Elevator application flow chart
7.1.1 Requirement Analysis
We recommend you to analyze the application requirements before the wiring design.
Basic configuration for elevator system with EV3100 is shown in Figure 7-2.
M
PG
Speed feedback
Weighing signal feedback Car
Counterweight
Controller
EV3100drive
inputterminal
Input power
Outputterminal
Figure 7-2 Basic configuration for elevator application
7.1.2 Confirm Your System Configuration
1. Designing new elevators
1) Determine drive capacity according to the traction machine power.
2) Basic function configuration: select a proper operation mode based on the actual requirements and the soft/hardware interface of your control board.
3) Determine the I/O terminals of your drive according to the selected operation mode. The I/O terminal specifications should meet the requirements in section 3.2.4 Terminals Of Control Board & Interface Board.
Note: section 7.3 Typical Applications offers you several control modes for new elevator design.
2. Renovating old elevators
1) Determine drive capacity according to the traction machine power.
2) Analyze the interface and control mode of the old control system and select a proper drive operation mode.
Note: in a control board system whose control board software is hard to upgrade and time sequence cannot meet the need of a certain typical application, consider keeping the old control mode and use EV3100 just to replace the old speed regulating equipment (VVVF drive, ACVV speed regulator or double speed system).
System function selection
1. Pre-torque, weight signal type (digital/analog).
2. Power off emergency running function, if required, select relevant accessories.
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 71
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
3. Other special functions, such as pulse frequency division output.
4. Fault detection and protection function, such as brake and contactors, etc.
7.1.3 Wiring Design
Design the wiring according to detailed requirement analysis. Refer to the basic wiring diagram in chapter 3. Note that:
1. When designing the wiring of control signal, note that digital COM, CM1 and CM2 are not connect by default. The 12V DC power between PGP and PGM is for PG only.
2. If external power is used to feed PLC terminal, COM terminal should be banned.
3. You can use a drive or an elevator controller to control the contactor at the output side. When drive controls, for the sake of safety, you can serial-connect the elevator safety signal to the contactor’s control loop; when elevator controller controls, it should meet drive’s requirement on contactor’s action sequence (for contactor action sequence, see section 7.2 Elevator Running Mode).
4. You can use a drive or an elevator controller to control the brake. When drive controls, for the sake of safety, you can serial-connect the elevator safety signal to the brake’s control loop; when elevator controller controls, it should meet drive’s requirement on brake’s action sequence (for brake action sequence, see section 7.2 Elevator Running Mode).
Note Except for the PG’s wiring, operation procedures for asynchronous motors and synchronous motors are the same. In the following text, unless otherwise specified, the operation methods are for both kinds of motors.
7.1.4 Field Installation And Wiring
The prerequisite for field installation and wiring is a correct and sound wiring diagram. Still, note the following during actual operation:
1. The installation and wiring, including that of the control cabinet and motor, should comply with the installation code on general industrial and electric equipment. Pay attention to the insulation and grounding requirements. Note that for drives, the grounding resistance should be smaller than 10Ω.
2. Select the sectional area of the power loop cable according to the power loop current. Separate control cables from power cables, make sure they do not go parallel to minimize the influence over control signal.
3. Sensors’ cables should be shielded and separated from the power cable.
4. Between any two drive output terminals U, V and W, or between any output terminal and the ground, there should
be no surge current absorber like capacitors or piezoresistors, or the drive could be damaged.
5. Never feed power to drive output terminals U, V and W.
For detailed installation and wiring operations, see Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring.
7.1.5 Wiring Check & Preparation
First check the installation and connection of PG (see section 3.2.4.2) and ground terminals.
Then carfully examine the conformity of actual wiring with design diagram, the security of cable connection and jumper position on the control board (see Figure 3-28 in section 3.2.4.4)
Finally, measure the voltage of power supply with multimeter to check whether the voltage can meet the requirements as specified in section 2.2 Technical Specifications.
7.1.6 Commissioning & Test
After wiring check, you can turn on the drive and do some simple test to see whether the drive can work normally.
1. Keypad control running: set F0.02 to 0 (keypad control), set F0.03 as per actual need. Use the keypad keys RUN and STOP to start and stop the motor. Refer to 4.4 Getting Started.
2. Inspection running: set F0.02 to 2, and control the drive to do inspection running through terminals INS and FWD/REV. See 4.4 Getting Started for details.
Note 1. During keypad control commissioning, set F0.03 (running speed) to a small value to avoid bumping accident. 2. Before commissioning, for asynchronous motors, you can choose open-loop vector control mode (F1.01 = 0); while for synchronous motors, you have to do autotuning and choose close-loop vector control (F1.01 = 3) in order to make the motor run normally. 3. If the drive keeps running in large-current low-speed state during close-loop vector control, the connection of PG A and B phases must have been reversed. You should cut off the running command to decelerate the drive to a stop, or the drive will trip and prompt E013 (drive overloaded).
7.1.7 Special Elevator Function Code
Proper setting of function code is key to elevator performance. Based on section 7.1.1 and the actual situation, determine the function codes that you need, and set the parameters by referring to Chapter 5 and Chapter 6.
1. General parameter setting procedures
Figure 7-3 is the flow chart of general parameter setting procedures. For drives applied to the elevator, even just for commissioning, you should always set the basic parameters for elevator application.
72 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Start torque compensationparameter setting
General driveparameter setting
Start
Elevator system basicparameter setting
General driveapplication?
Distance control?
Yes
No
No
Yes
End
Passwordneeded?
Yes
No
Vector controlparameter setting
Motor parameter setting
Speed curveparameter setting
Distance controlparameter setting
Autolearningparameter setting
Password settingF0.00
Vector controlparameter setting
Programmable terminalparameter setting
Motor parameter setting
Figure 7-3 General parameter setting procedures
2. Detailed parameter setting procedures
Figure 7-3 shows the general procedures in setting EV3100 drive parameters. What follows is the detailed setting procedures.
Figure 7-4 is the elevator basic parameter setting procedures. Figure 7-5 is the parameter setting procedures for general purpose drives.
Start
End
F0.02 = 0 (keypad control)
Set max. output frequencyF0.06
Set max. output frequencyF0.06
Start
End
Set rated speedF0.05
Set mechanical parameterF1.07
Set operation modeF0.02(F0.02≠0)
Set rated speedF0.05
Set running speedF0.03
Set speed curve
F3.11~F3.16
Figure 7-4 Elev. para. Figure 7-5 General para.
The setting of basic parameters is followed by the motor parameter setting. See Figure 7-6 for details.
Start
End
Set PG pulse numberF1.00
Set control modeF1.01=3
Set motor powerF1.02
Set rated voltageF1.03
Set rated frequencyF1.05
Set rated speedF1.06
Start parameter tuningF1.11=1
Record parameters after tuningF1.12~F1.17(Asynchronous)FA.03~FA.07(Synchronous)
Yes
Synchronousmotor?
NoSet rated current
F1.04
Select PG typeFA.00=2/3
Asynchronous Synchronous
Tuning protection enableF1.10=1
Figure 7-6 Motor parameter setting procedures
For a general purpose drive, what follows should be the setting of vector control parameter, which could be adjusted during running. And that would be the end of parameter setting for a general purpose drive.
However, for an elevator drive, what follows is the setting of programmable terminal function parameters. You can set these parameters according to your control electric diagram. See Figure 7-7 for the setting procedures of programmable terminal function parameters.
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 73
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
No
End
Start
Yes
No
Yes
MS running?
Use forced-Dec. switch?
Floorinstruction?
No
Yes
Set parameters11~14,26~33(LS)
No
Yes
Stop-requestdistance control?
No
Y
Batt. drivenrunning?
No
Y
Brakefeedback?
No
Y
Digital weightinput?
No
Yes
Externalfault input?
N
YesStandard interfaceprovided?
No
Y
Reset and initializeneeded?
Set parameters15(DCE),39(REQ)
Set parameters8~10(MS1~MS3)
Set parameters1~6(F1~F6)
Set terminal functionparameterF5.00~F5.13
Set parameters16,17(EXT)
Set parameters18(RST),7(INI)
Set parameters19(BAT)
Set parameters20,21(BSM)
Set parameters22~25(WD1~WD4)
Set parameters43(PXi)
Set logic definitionF5.14~F5.29
Set output signalF5.30~F5.40
Figure 7-7 Programmable terminal function parameters
setting procedures
For distance controlled running, the setting of programmable terminal function parameters should be followed by the setting of autolearning and distance control parameters. Figure 7-8 shows the setting procedures for autolearing parameters, while Figure 7-9 shows the procedures for distance control parameters.
End
Auto-save after autolearningF4.07~F4.57
Start
End
Set distance controlspeed curve
F4.02~F4.06
Set leveling adjustF3.02, F3.22
Set max. floor heightF4.01
Set total floor numberF4.00
Set autolearning speedF3.17
Start
Figure 7-8 Autolearning Figure 7-9 Distance ctrl.
The above parameter settings ensures the normal running. To meet the need for comfort and efficiency, you need to set the speed curve parameters. See Figure 7-10 for related setting procedures.
No
End
Yes
Start
Yes
Set MS speedF3.03~F3.10
No
Yes
Set start/stop parametersF3.00~F3.02
MS running?
Batt. drivenrunning?
F3.10~F3.15Set speed curve
F3.11~F3.16
Inspection running?
Yes
Forced Dec.switch?
No
No
Analog speedreference?
Set analog filtering& zero bias
F6.00~F6.06
No
Yes
Set batt. drivenrunning speed curve
F3.18, F3.19
Set inspection runningspeed curve
F3.20, F3.21
Set creeping speedF3.22
Set forced Dec.F3.23/F3.25/F3.27
Set forced Dec. detectionF3.24/F3.26/F3.28
Figure 7-10 Speed curve parameters setting
What follows next is the setting of vector control parameters, which can make the elevator more comfortable. See section 6.3 Vector Control (F2.0 ~ F2.20) for details.
Still, if the elevator is fitted with a weighing device, the start torque compensation should be set. See Figure 7-11 for the setting procedures.
Start torquecompensation?
End
Yes
No
Start
Set digital weighing signal
F2.09~F2.12
Pre-torqueselect
Torquecompensationsatisfactory?
Yes
No
Pre-torque adjustF2.14~F2.16
Gain adjustF2.15~F2.16
F2.08=1(Digital)
F2.08=0
Balance adjustF2.14
F2.08=2(Analog)
Figure 7-11 Torque compensation para. setting
That is the end of drive parameter setting.
You can set user password, if you need. After that, you need to input the right password everytime you want to change the parameter setting in the programming mode. For details, see section 4.3.5 User Password.
3. Elevator control mode priorities
In practice, there could be serveral control mode inputs at the same time. The drive will automatically run in the mode
74 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
with higher priority. The control mode priority is shown below:
Distancecontrolrunning
Autolearning,inspection running,batt. driven running
MSspeed
running
PriorityHigh Low
Figure 7-12 Control mode priority
7.1.8 Tests And Parameter Tuning
After the parameter setting, check them against the requirements, especially those closely related to drive peripheral electric wiring, such as operation mode, control mode, programmable input/output, feedback signal, etc.
Then, you can start system test, which includes motor parameter tuning, inspection running, autolearning, normal running S curve adjusting, comfort adjusting during elevator start/stop and elevator leveling precision adjusting.
Motor parameter tuning
Before tuning, remove the hoist cable from the wheel of the traction machine to make it zero-loaded. Set F0.02 to zero (keypad control mode), and start the parameter tuning by refering to the description of F1.10 and F1.11 in section 6.2 Traction Machine Parameters.
For your convenience, you can copy or directly input parameters that have been already tuned if traction machines are of the same model of the same manufacturer.
Inspection running
The inspection running is to ensure that the elevator can run normally. If the actual elevator running direction is not the command direction, you can exchange any two of the output cables U, V and W, or change the value of F0.04.
For the wiring diagram and running time sequence during inspection running, see section 7.2.5 Inspection Running.
Autolearning
If you need distance control function, start shaft autolearning.
For the wiring diagram and running time sequence during autolearning, see section 7.2.4 Autolearning.
If faults occur during autolearning, correct them and restart the process until shaft positions are correctly recorded.
Normal running S curve adjusting
In the normal running, before the running S curve adjusting, you need to confirm that the control logic and wiring are correct.
For details, see the description of F3.00 ~ F3.02 and F3.11 ~ F3.06 in section 6.4 Speed Curve.
Comfort adjusting during elevator start/stop
1) You can adjust the comfort at elevator start through the following parameters:
F3.00 (start speed) , F3.01 (start speed hold time)
F2.02, F2.03 (low frequency PI parameter)
F7.00 (Brake release delay)
If weighing device is used, you need to adjust the start torque compensation. For details, see the description of F2.08 ~ F2.16 in section 6.3 Vector Control (F2.0 ~ F2.20).
2) You can adjust the comfort at elevator stop through the following parameters:
F2.02, F2.03 (low frequency PI parameters)
F7.01 (Brake close delay)
F3.02 (Jerky Dec.)
For the adjusting method, see the detailed description in Chapter 6.
Elevator leveling precision adjusting
When the leveling precision is different at different floors, adjust the leveling detection plate position to unify the leveling precision.
When the leveling differences at different floors become the same, you can adjust the leveling precision through F3.22 and F3.02.
7.1.9 Operation And Maintenance
After all the settings and tests, the system is ready for normaly operation. Generally do not change the parameters once they are set correctly.
If faults occur during operation, refer to Chapter 8 Trouble Shooting.
To ensure long service life and better performance of the elevator system, regular maintenance is necessary. The maintenance involves mechanical parts, traction machine, electric equipment and the drive. See Chapter 9 Maintenance for maintenance information of the drive.
7.2 Elevator Running Mode
Except auto-tuning, all the other six running modes introduced in section 4.1.3 can be classified into two groups:
Common running: MS, distance control and ordinary running
Special running: autolearning, inspection and battery-driven running
7.2.1 MS Running
This section introduces the MS running in terminal control mode. MS running in communication control mode is the same, except that the control command is given through communication with the host.
1. Basic wiring
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 75
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X3(CSM)
X1(ENA)
X2(RST)
FWD
REV
X6(MS1)
X7(MS2)
X8(MS3)
Y1
Y2
U
V
W
TA,TB,TC
Elevator controller
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM EV3100
(Elevator stop)
(Run)
(Fault)
Figure 7-13 MS running basic wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-13 are the functions of programmable terminals. See Table 7-1 for details.
Table 7-1 MS running programmable terminals
Terminal Explanation
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X2) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command MS1 Input terminal (X6) signal: MS 1 MS2 Input terminal (X7) signal: MS 2 MS3 Input terminal (X8) signal: MS 3
CRA-CRC Relay output signal: serial connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRC Relay output signal: serial connectible safety circuit to control brake
CSM Input terminal (X3) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally closed/open contact
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: running TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC: normally open; TA-TB: normally closed)
2. Running time sequence
MS1
MS2
MS3
ON OFF
ON
OFF ON
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
OFF
CR
BR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Input
Output
T1
T2
T3
T5
t
v
T4
2sY1
ON OFFY2
Figure 7-14 MS running time sequence
The definition of each delay in Figure 7-14 is detailed in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Time delay definition
Code Definition T1 Delay between contactor close and drive turnon T2 Brake relay delay (F7.00) T3 Brake close delay (F7.01)
T4 Drive OFF delay (external command controlled) To ensure a comfortable stop, cut off command FWD after the brake is completely closed.
T5 Contactor release delay (drive internally controlled to ensure no current exist when contactor opens)
Time sequence description:
1) Drive receives FWD command and speed instruction (MS1 ~ MS3) and outputs contactor close command (CR).
2) When the drive detects contactor closed signal (CSM), after T1 delay, outputs brake release command (BR) and drive running signal (Y2).
3) After T2, the brake is completely open and drive starts to Acc following S curve.
4) Controller cancels speed instruction (MS1 ~ MS3) and drive begins to stop. A delay T3 after speed reaches zero, drive outputs brake close command (BR), also the elevator stop signal (Y1) which asks the controller to cut off FWD command.
5) Controller receives elevator stop signal and cuts off FWD command within T4. The drive then stops PWM and outputs STOP state signal Y2.
6) T5 after Y2 is sent, output current becomes zero. The drive then outputs contactor release command CR. A complete running process is over.
3. Function code setting
76 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
F0.02 = 2/3, terminal speed/distance control select
F3.00 ~ F3.16, speed curve setting
7.2.2 Distance Control Running
Two distance control running modes will be introduced here: floor-signal distance control and STOP-request distance control.
Floor-signal distance control
1. Basic wiring
……
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X3(CSM)
FWD
REV
X4(FLE)
X10(F6)
UPL
DWL
X1(ENA)
X2(RST)
U
V
W
EV3100
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM
X5(F1)
……
Elevator controller
TA,TB,TC(Fault)
Y1
Y2
(Elevator stop)
(Run)
Figure 7-15 Floor-signal distance ctrl basic wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-15 are the functions of programmable terminals. See Table 7-3 for details.
Table 7-3 Floor-signal distance ctrl terminals
Terminal Definition
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X2) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command
FLE Input terminal (X4) signal: destination floor setting command
F1 ~ F6 Input terminal (X5 ~ X10) signal: floor instruction UPL Input terminal signal: UP leveling signal DWL Input terminal signal: DOWN leveling signal
CRA-CRC
Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRC Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control brake
CSM Input terminal (X3) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally open/closed contact
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: running
TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC: normal open output; TA-TB: Normally closed output)
2. Running time sequence
OFF OFF
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
OFF
CR
BR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Input
Output
t
v
FLE
UPL ON
Y1 2s
/ DWL
Leveling
ON ON
ON OFFY2
T1
T2
T3T4
T5
Figure 7-16 Floor-signal distance ctrl time sequence
In Figure 7-16, the definitions of delays T1 ~ T5 are the same as MS running. See Table 7-2 Time delay definition.
Time sequence description:
1) After receiving FWD command and floor setting instruction (FLE, F1 ~ F6) from controller, drive outputs contactor close command (CR)
2) When the drive detects contactor closed signal (CSM), after T1, outputs brake release command (BR) and drive running signal Y2.
3) After T2, the brake completely opens, and drive begins Acc. following S curve.
4) In the running process, the elevator can respond to other floor instructions (FLE, F1 ~ F6). The drive will choose to stop at the optimal floor in terms of Dec. conditions.
5) Drive begins the Dec to stop process when reaching the Dec point of the curve. The speed becomes zero after moving certain distance (F4.07) in the leveling state. After T3, drive outputs brake close command (BR) and elevator stop signal (Y1), informing the controller to cut off FWD command.
6) Controller receives the elevator stop signal and after T4, cuts off the FWD command. The drive stops PWM and outputs STOP state signal (Y2).
7) T5 after Y2 is sent, the output current becomes zero, and drive outputs contactor release command (CR). A complete running process is over.
3. Function code setting
F0.02=3: select terminal distance control
F3.00 ~ F3.16: set S curve
F4.02 ~ F4.06: set distance control speed
F4.07: adjust leveling distance
STOP-request distance control running
1. Basic wiring
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 77
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA
(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X3(CSM)
FWD
REV
X4(REQ)
X5(DCE)
UPL
DWL
X1(ENA)
X2(RST)
U
V
W
Elevator controller
EV3100
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM
TA,TB,TC(Fault)
Y1
Y2
(Elevator stop)
(Dec. point passing)
Figure 7-17 STOP-req distance ctrl wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-17 are the functions of programmable terminals. See Table 7-4 for details.
Table 7-4 STOP-req distance ctrl terminals
Terminal Definition
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X2) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command REQ Input terminal (X4) signal: STOP-request command DCE Input terminal (X5) signal: STOP-request enable UPL Input terminal signal: up leveling signal DWL Input terminal signal: down leveling signal
CRA-CRC Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRC Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control brake
CSM Input terminal (X3) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally open/closed contact
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: Dec point passed
TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC: normally open output. TA-TB: normally closed output)
2. Running time sequence
OFF OFF
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
OFF
CR
BR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Input
Output
t
v
REQ
UPL ON
Y12s
/ DWL
Leveling
ON
ON OFFRunning
ONDCE OFF
Y2 ON ON ON OFFOFFOFF OFF
T1
T2T3
T4
T5
Figure 7-18 STOP-req distance ctrl time sequence
In Figure 7-18, the definitions of delays T1 ~ T5 are the same as MS running. See Table 7-2 Time delay definition.
1) Drive receives FWD command and STOP-request distance control enable command (DCE) from controller and outputs contactor close command (CR)
2) When the drive detects contactor closed signal (CSM), after T1, outputs brake release command (BR) and drive running signal Y2.
3) After T2, the brake completely opens, and drive begins Acc. following S curve.
4) In the running process, when the Dec. pass signal (Y2) is valid, the stop request (REQ) from the controller means the elevator should stop at the coming floor. Then, the elevator starts Dec. after reaching the curve Dec. point.
The speed becomes zero after moving certain distance (F4.07) in the leveling state. After T3, drive outputs brake close command (BR) and elevator stop signal (Y1), informing the controller to cut off FWD command.
5) Controller receives Y1, and after T4, cuts off FWD command, STOP-request distance control enable command (DCE) and stop request command (REQ). Drive stops PWM and outputs STOP state signal Y2.
6) T5 after Y2 is sent, the output current becomes zero, drive outputs contactor release command (CR). A complete running process is over.
3. Function code setting
F0.02 = 2: select terminal speed control
F3.11 ~ F3.16: set S curve
F4.02 ~ F4.06: set speed for distance control
F4.07: adjust leveling precision
F5.36: adjust Dec point output lead time
7.2.3 Common Running
The keypad control (F0.02 = 0) and analog speed control are all command running mode. The following is an introduction to the analog speed control running.
78 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
1. Basic wiring
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X3(CSM)
FWD
REV
AI2(Speedinstruction)
GND
X1(ENA)
X2(RST)
TA,TB,TC
Y1
Y2
U
V
W
Elevator controller
EV3100
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM
(Fault)
(Elevator stop)
(Run)
Figure 7-19 Common running basic wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-19 are the function of programmable terminals. See Table 7-5 for details.
Table 7-5 Common running terminals
Terminal Definition
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X2) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command
AI2-GND Drive input signal: analog speed setting signal
CRA-CRC Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRC Relay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control brake
CSM Input terminal (X3) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally open/closed contact
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: running
TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC: normally open output. TA-TB: normally closed)
2. Running time sequence
The same as that of MS running, except that the running speed instruction is given by AI2 instead of MS1 ~ MS3.
3. Running curve
.. ..F3.11
.. .. F3.14
t
v
Figure 7-20 Common running curve
Drive’s S curve is disregarded in analog speed mode.
The analog speed curve is determined by external analog variables: the more continuous the analog variable is, the smoother the curve will be.
At Acc section of the curve, the max. Acc rate is valid, i.e., the Acc rate cannot exceed F3.11.
At Dec section of the curve, the max. Dec rate is valid, i.e., the Dec rated cannot exceed F3.14.
4. Function code setting
F0.02=1: select analog speed control
F6.01: analog input AI2 filtering, ensure system stability
F6.06: analog input AI2 zero bias adjustment
F3.11, F3.14: the greater the settings are, the closer the actual speed traces the analog reference speed.
7.2.4 Autolearning
1. Basic wiring
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X4(CSM)
FWD
REV
X2(SL)
X1(ENA)
X3(RST)
TA,TB,TC
Y1
Y2
U
V
W
Elevator controller
EV3100
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM
UPL
DWL (Fault)
(Elevator stop)
(Run)
Figure 7-21 Autolearning basic wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-21 are the functions of programmable terminals. See Table 7-6 for details.
Table 7-6 Autolearning terminals
Terminal Definition
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X3) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command UPL Input terminal signal: up leveling signal DWL Input terminal signal: down leveling signal SL Input terminal (X2) signal: autolearning command
CRA-CRCRelay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRCRelay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control brake
CSM Input terminal (X4) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally open/closed contact
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 79
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Terminal Definition
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: running
TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC normally open output; TA-TB: normally closed)
Preparations:
1) Run the elevator to the position slightly lower than the bottom leveling area (in inspection running mode)
2) Set function code F9.03 (current floor) = 1
3) Ensure the autolearning running direction is FWD
2. Running time sequence
SL ON
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
ON ON ONOFF OFF
t
v
Low speed
UPL
N-1 floorF3.17: Autolearning speed
⋯⋯/ DWL
CR
BR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Output
Y1 2s
ON OFFY2
T1
T2
T3T4
T5
Input
Figure 7-22 Autolearning time sequence
In Figure 7-22, the definitions of delays T1 ~ T5 are the same as MS running. See Table 7-2 Time delay definition.
Description of running time sequence:
1) Drive receives FWD command and autolearning command (SL) from controller and outputs contactor close command (CR)
2) When the drive detects contactor closed signal (CSM), after T1, outputs brake release command (BR) and drive running signal Y2.
3) After T2, the brake completely opens, and drive begins to accelerate to the preset autolearning speed (F3.17).
4) During autolearning, when passing a floor, the drive will record the floor height automatically. If the height is greater than the preset max. height (F4.01) yet no leveling signal is received, error code E033 will be prompted.
5) At the last but one floor, the drive dereases speed automatically. If forced deceleration switch signal input is selected, when UP forced deceleration switch acts, the drive will also decrease speed.
6) Arriving at the top floor, drive begins Dec to stop. T3 after the speed reaches zero, the drive outputs brake close command (BR) and elevator stop signal Y1 to inform the controller to cut off FWD command.
7) After receiving Y1, T4 later, the controller cuts off FWD and SL commands, the drive then stops PWM waveform and outputs STOP state signal Y2.
8) T5 after Y2 is sent, the output current becomes zero, the drive outputs brake release command (CR), and a complete autolearning process is over. The floor heights are recorded in F4.07 ~ F4.57.
3. Function code setting
F0.02 ≠ 0
F3.11 ~ F3.16: set S curve
F3.17: set autolearning speed
F1.00: PG pulse number
F4.00: total floor number
F4.01: max. floor height
7.2.5 Inspection Running
1. Basic wiring
M
KM1
KM2PG
PG feedback
CRC
CRA(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC (Brake control)
X4(CSM)
FWD
REV
X3(INS)
X1(ENA)
X2(RST)
TA,TB,TC
Y1
Y2
U
V
W
Elevator controller
EV3100
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
KM
(Fault)
(Elevator stop)
(Run)
Figure 7-23 Inspection running basic wiring
Enclosed in the brackets in Figure 7-23 are the functions of programmable terminals. See Table 7-7 for details.
Table 7-7 Inspection running terminals
Terminal Definition
ENA Input terminal (X1) signal: enable (connectible to safety circuit)
RST Input terminal (X2) signal: fault reset command FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command
INS Input terminal (X3) signal: inspection running command
CRA-CRCRelay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control contactor
BRA-BRCRelay output signal: connectible to safety circuit to control brake
80 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Terminal Definition
CSM Input terminal (X4) signal: can be introduced from contactor normally open/closed contact
Y1 Open collector output signal 1: elevator stop (2s of pulse signal)
Y2 Open collector output signal 2: running
TA-TC TA-TB
Relay output signal: alarm output (TA-TC: normally open output; TA-TB: normally closed output)
2. Running time sequence
FWD ON OFF
CSM ON OFF
OFF
CR
BR
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Input
Output
t
v
ON
Y12s
INS
F3.20: Inspection Speed F3.21: InspectionDeceleration
ON OFFY2
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
F3.11: Acceleration Rate
Figure 7-24 Inspection running time sequence
In Figure 7-24, the definitions of delays T1 ~ T5 are the same as MS running. See Table 7-2 Time delay definition.
Description of running time sequence:
1) Drive receives FWD command and inspection running command (INS) from controller and outputs contactor close command (CR)
2) When the drive detects contactor closed signal (CSM), after T1, outputs brake release command (BR) and drive running signal Y2.
3) After T2, the brake completely opens, and drive begins to accelerate at the rate of F3.11 to the preset inspection running speed (F3.20).
4) Controller cuts off INS command, the drive begins to Dec at the rate of F3.21. T3 after the speed reaches zero, drive outputs brake close command (BR) and elevator stop signal Y1 to inform the control to cut off FWD command.
5) After receiving Y1, T4 later, the controller cuts off FWD command, the drive then stops PWM waveform and outputs STOP state signal Y2.
6) T5 after Y2 is sent, the output current becomes zero, the drive outputs brake release command (CR), and a complete inspection running process is over.
3. Function code setting
F0.02 ≠ 0
F3.20: set inspection running speed
F3.11: set inspection Acc rate
F3.21: set inspection Dec rate
7.2.6 Battery Driven Running
1. Basic wiring
M
KM1
KM2
X1(BAT)
(-)
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
R
S
T
U V W
Emergency power>240VDC
(+)
KM
EV3100
-
+KM3
REVFWD
Figure 7-25 Battery driven running basic wiring
The terminals in Figure 7-25 are defined in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Battery driven running terminals
Terminal Definition FWD Input terminal signal: FWD/UP command REV Input terminal signal: REV/DOWN command
BAT Input terminal (X1) signal: select battery driven running command
(+) , (-) Drive DC bus voltage terminals KM Mains power control contactor KM3 Battery power control contactor
2. Running time sequence
ON OFF
Emergency power ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
UPL
BR
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
/ DWL
t
v
ON
Main power
F3.18: Emergency SpeedF3.19F3.19
BAT
CSM
(KM)
(KM3)
FWD/ REV
T1
T2 T3
Leveling
Figure 7-26 Battery driven running time sequence
Description of running time sequence:
1) When mains fails, the mains power control contactor KM opens, and after T1, the battery power control contactor KM3 closes and outputs battery driven running command BAT.
2) After T2, controller outputs FWD/REV running command. When drive receives the command, the running contactor
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 81
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
will be closed and brake be released. The drive Acc at the rate of F3.19 till the speed of F3.18.
3) When the elevator runs near a leveling area, the controller cuts off the BAT command, and drive begins to Dec at the rate of F3.19 to stop.
4) Drive outputs brake close signal after the speed Dec to zero. After T3, controller cuts off the FWD/REV running command and drive releases the contactor. A complete battery driven running process is over.
The delays in Figure 7-26 are defined in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9 Delay definition
Delay Definition
T1
Interval between mains power failure and battery power output. (the DC bus voltage must be smaller than the battery voltage before KM3 can be closed to output battery power)
T2 Interval between battery power output and running command output
T3 Interval between elevator stop and running command cutoff
3. Function code setting
F0.02 ≠ 0
F3.19: set battery driven running Acc/Dec rate
F3.18: set battery driven running speed
Note 1. The battery voltage should be bigger than 240V to ensure normal operation. 2. In the battery driven running mode, the drive does not detect the input phase failure.
7.3 Typical Application
Note: Except for the connection of encoder, the wiring and setup of function codes in the following examples are suitable for both asynchronous and synchronous motors.
7.3.1 Example One (MS Running)
A certain elevator with rated speed of 1.750m/s uses a drive in MS running mode. The brake and contactor are controlled by the drive, and the state of contactors is detected by feedback signal. The inspection running is controlled by drive’s INS terminal, speed intruction is from MS1 ~ MS3, and analog weighing device is used.
The control system design is shown in Figure 7-27. See Chapter 3 for wiring information.
82 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
M
KM1
KM2PG
CRC
CRA
(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC(Brake control)
Analog weighing signal input
Car
Counterweight
AI1
(X2)CSM1
X1(ENA)
FWD
REV
X6(MS1)
X7(MS2)
X8(MS3)Y1
Y2
KM1, KM2Contactor normally open input
Elevator controller
Elevator stop
Run
Fault
Enable
InspectionX3(INS)
Up
Down
PG feedback
U
V
W
EV3100
(+) PB
R
S
T
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
EMIfilter
MCCB KM
TA,TB,TC
Figure 7-27 Control system design (example 1)
See Table 7-10 for the general function codes necessary for all application examples 1 ~ 3.
Table 7-10 General function codes setup
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F0.06 Max. Output Frequency 60.00Hz F1.00 Number of PG Pulse - F1.01 Control Mode - Dependent on motor type F1.02 Motor Power Traction machine power Nameplate parameter F1.03 Motor Rated Voltage 380V Nameplate parameter F1.04 Motor Rated Current Traction machine rated current Nameplate parameter F1.05 Motor Rated Frequency 50.00Hz Nameplate parameter F1.06 Motor Rated Speed Traction machine rated speed Nameplate parameter F1.07 Traction Machine Mechanical Parameters As calculated F2.00 ASR Proportional Gain 1 2 F2.01 ASR Integral Time 1 1s F2.02 ASR Proportional Gain 2 3 F2.03 ASR Integral Time 2 0.5s F2.04 ASR Switching Frequency 5Hz F2.06 Drive Torque Limit 180.0% F2.07 Brake Torque Limit 180.0%
Adjust according to performance
See Table 7-11 for function codes exclusive to application Example One.
Table 7-11 Setting of function codes exclusive to example one
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F0.02 Operation Mode 2 Select terminal speed control F0.05 Elevator Rated Speed 1.750m/s Rated elevator speed F2.08 Pre-torque Select 2 Select analog torque bias
F2.14 Torque Bias F2.15 Torque Bias Gain (drive side) F2.16 Torque Bias Gain (brake side)
-
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 83
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F3.00 Start Speed 0 F3.01 Start Time 0 F3.02 Jerky Dec 0.350 m/s3
-
F3.03 MS 0 0 F3.04 MS 1 Re-leveling speed F3.05 MS 2 Creeping speed F3.06 MS 3 Battery driven speed
As designed
F3.07 MS 4 Reserved F3.08 MS 5 Normal low speed F3.09 MS 6 Normal mid speed F3.10 MS 7 Normal high speed
As designed
F3.11 Acceleration Rate 0.700m/s2 F3.12 Acceleration Jerk at Start Section 0.350 m/s3 F3.13 Acceleration Jerk at End Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.14 Deceleration Rate 0.700 m/s2 F3.15 Dec Jerk at Start Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.16 Dec Jerk at End Section 0.350 m/s3 F3.20 Inspection Running Speed 0.400 m/s3 F3.21 Inspection Running Ded 1.000 m/s2
Adjust according to performance
F5.00 X1 Terminal Function 34 ENA F5.01 X2 Terminal Function 36 CSM1 F5.02 X3 Terminal Function 38 INS F5.05 X6 Terminal Function 8 MS1 F5.06 X7 Terminal Function 9 MS2 F5.07 X8 Terminal Function 10 MS3 F5.30 Y1 Terminal Function 7 Elevator stop F5.31 Y2 Terminal Function 1 Running F5.35 Y1/Y2/CR/BR Action Mode Select 0 Act when output signal is valid
F6.00 AI1 Filter Time Constant Adjust according to actual situation
F6.04 Analog Input Select 1 AI1 is input as a weighing signal
F6.05 AI1 Zero Bias Adjust Adjust according to actual situation
F7.00 Brake Release Delay F7.01 Brake Close Delay
Adjust according to actual situation
F7.02 Feedback Input Select 1 Select contactor feedback
7.3.2 Example Two (Floor-signal Distance Control)
A 15-floor building, max. floor height: 3.5m. The elevator with the rated speed of 2.000m/s uses a drive in the terminal floor-signal distance control. The brake and contactor are controlled by drive control signals, and contactor feedback is used for detecting the contactor state. Normally the elevator running is distance controlled. Inspection running is controlled by INS terminal, re-leveling running, by MS1 terminal; and autolearning, by SL terminal. There is only one leveling switch, and digital weighing device is used. See Figure 7-28 for the design of control system. Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed wiring information.
84 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
IM
KM1
KM2PG
CRC
CRA
(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC(Brake control)
Digital weighing signal input
Car
Counterweight
X11~X14(WD1~WD4)
X5(CSM1)
X1(ENA)
X2(SL)
Y1
Y2
U
V
W
TA,TB,TC
EV3100
(+) PB
KM1, KM2Contactor normally open input
Elevator controller
Elevator stop
Run
Fault
Enable
InspectionX3(INS)
FWD
REV
Up
Down
PG feedback
Autolearning
X6(MS1)Re-leveling
X4(FLE)Floor setup
UPL
Levelingsignal
DWL
R
S
T
3ph input power380V,50/60HZ
EMIfilter
MCCB KM
X7~X10(F1~F4)Floor signal
Figure 7-28 Control system design (example 2)
The setting of general function codes for example two is in Table 7-10, while exclusive function code setting is in Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Setting of function codes exclusive to example two
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F0.02 Operation Mode 3 Select terminal distance control
F0.05 Elevator Rated Speed 2.000m/s F2.08 Pre-torque Select 1 Select digital torque bias
F2.09 Digital Weigh Signal 1 F2.10 Digital Weigh Signal 2 F2.11 Digital Weigh Signal 3 F2.12 Digital Weigh Signal 4
Set according to the load class of switches
F2.14 Torque Bias F2.15 Torque Bias Gain (drive side) F2.16 Torque Bias Gain (brake side)
Set according to actual situation
F3.00 Start Speed 0 F3.01 Start Time 0
Set according to actual situation
F3.04 MS 1 0.050m/s Re-leveling speed, adjusted onsite F3.11 Acceleration Rate 0.700m/s2 F3.12 Acceleration Jerk at Start Section 0.350 m/s3 F3.13 Acceleration Jerk at End Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.14 Dec Rate 0.700 m/s2 F3.15 Dec Jerk at Start Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.16 Dec Jerk at End Section 0.350 m/s3
Adjusted onsite
F3.17 Autolearning Speed 0.400m/s F3.20 Inspection Running Speed 0.400 m/s3 F3.21 Inspection Running Dec 1.000 m/s2
Adjusted onsite
F3.22 Creeping Speed 0.050m/s Adjusted according to leveling precision
F4.00 Floor Number 15 F4.01 Max. Floor Height 3.5m
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 85
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F4.02 Max. Speed of Curve 1 0.800m/s F4.03 Max. Speed of Curve 2 1.000m/s F4.04 Max. Speed of Curve 3 1.200m/s F4.05 Max. Speed of Curve 4 1.500m/s F4.06 Max. Speed of Curve 5 1.750m/s
If error E032 occurs during operation, decrease the value of F4.02
F4.07 Leveling Distance Adjusted according to actual situation
F5.00 X1 Terminal Function 34 ENA F5.01 X2 Terminal Function 35 SL F5.02 X3 Terminal Function 38 INS F5.03 X4 Terminal Function 40 FLE F5.04 X5 Terminal Function 36 CSM1 F5.05 X6 Terminal Function 8 MS1 F5.06 X7 Terminal Function 1 F1 F5.07 X8 Terminal Function 2 F2 F5.08 X9 Terminal Function 3 F3 F5.09 X10 Terminal Function 4 F4 F5.10 X11 Terminal Function 22 F5.11 X12 Terminal Function 23 F5.12 X13 Terminal Function 24 F5.13 X14 Terminal Function 25
Digital weighing signal WD1 ~ WD4
F5.30 Y1 Terminal Function 7 Elevator stop F5.31 Y2 Terminal Function 1 Running F5.35 Y1/Y2/CR/BR Action Mode Select 0 Act upon valid output signal
F7.00 Brake Release Delay F7.01 Brake Close Delay
Adjusted according to actual situation
F7.02 Feedback Input Select 1 Select contactor feedback and leveling signal normally open input
7.3.3 Example Three (Stop-Request Distance Control)
A 16 floor building. Max. floor height: 3.5. The elevator with rated speed of 1.750m/s uses a drive in terminal speed control mode. The brake and contactor are controlled by drive control signals, and contactor feedback is used to detect the contactor state. Normally the elevator running is controlled by STOP-request distance control. Inspection running is controlled by INS terminal. Re-leveling speed is determined by MS1, and autolearning is controlled by SL terminal. Use a pair of Up/Down forced deceleration switches and two leveling switches. Use digital weighing device.
See Figure 7-29 for the system design. Refer to Chapter 3 Installation And Wiring for detailed wiring information.
86 Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
IM
KM1
KM2PG
CRC
CRA
(Contactor control)
BRA
BRC(Brake control)
Digital weighing signal input
Car
Counterweight
X11~X14(WD1~WD4)
X7(CSM1)
X1(ENA)
X2(SL)
X6(MS1)
X9(2LS2)Y1
TA,TB,TC
KM1, KM2
Elevator controller
Elevator stop
Fault
Enable
InspectionX3(INS)
FWD
REV
Up
Down
PG feedbackAutolearning
Re-leveling
ForcedDec. signal
X4(REQ)Stop request
X5(DCE)Distance control enable
X10(1LS2)
UPLUp leveling
DWLDown leveling
Y2Dec. point passing
U
V
W
EV3100
(+) PB
R
S
T
3ph power input380V,50/60HZ
EMIfilter
MCCB KM
Figure 7-29 Control system design (example three)
The setting of general function codes for example three is in Table 7-10, while exclusive function code setting is in Table 7-13.
Table 7-13 Setting of function codes exclusive to example two
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F0.02 Operation Mode 2 Select terminal speed control
F0.05 Elevator Rated Speed 1.750m/s F2.08 Pre-torque Select 1 Select digital torque bias
F2.09 Digital Weigh Signal 1 F2.10 Digital Weigh Signal 2 F2.11 Digital Weigh Signal 3 F2.12 Digital Weigh Signal 4
Load setting according to switches
F2.14 Torque Bias F2.15 Torque Bias Gain (drive side) F2.16 Torque Bias (brake side) F3.00 Start Speed 0 F3.01 Start Time 0
Adjusted according to actual situation
F3.04 MS 1 0.050m/s Re-leveling speed, adjusted on-site F3.11 Acceleration Rate 0.700m/s2 F3.12 Acceleration Jerk at Start Section 0.350 m/s3 F3.13 Acceleration Jerk at End Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.14 Deceleration 0.700 m/s2 F3.15 Deceleration Jerk at Start Section 0.600 m/s3 F3.16 Deceleration Jerk at End Section 0.350 m/s3
Adjusted on-site
F3.17 Autolearning Speed 0.400m/s F3.20 Inspection Running Speed 0.400 m/s F3.21 Inspection Running Dec 1.000 m/s2
Adjusted on-site
F3.22 Creeping speed 0.050m/s Adjusted according to leveling precision F3.23 Forced Dec 1 1.000 m/s2 F3.24 Triggering Point of Forced Dec 1 97%
Adjusted according to actual situation
F4.00 Floor Number 16 F4.01 Max. Floor Height 3.5m
Chapter 7 Elevator Application Guidance 87
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Function code Name Recommended value Remark F4.02 Max. Speed of Curve 1 0.800m/s F4.03 Max. Speed of Curve 2 1.000m/s F4.04 Max. Speed of Curve 3 1.200m/s F4.05 Max. Speed of Curve 4 1.400m/s F4.06 Max. Speed of Curve 5 1.600m/s
If error E032 occurs during operation, reduce the value of F4.02
F4.07 Leveling Distance Adjusted according to actual situation
F5.00 X1 Terminal Function 34 ENA F5.01 X2 Terminal Function 35 SL F5.02 X3 Terminal Function 38 INS F5.03 X4 Terminal Function 39 REQ F5.04 X5 Terminal Function 15 DCE F5.05 X6 Terminal Function 8 MS1 F5.06 X7 Terminal Function 36 CSM1 F5.08 X9 Terminal Function 12 2LS2 F5.09 X10 Terminal Function 14 1LS2 F5.10 X11 Terminal Function 22 F5.11 X12 Terminal Function 23 F5.12 X13 Terminal Function 24 F5.13 X14 Terminal Function 25
Digital weighing signal WD1 ~ WD4
F5.30 Y1 Terminal Function 7 Elevator stop F5.31 Y2 Terminal Function 6 Dec. point passing F5.35 Y1/Y2/CR/BR Action Mode Select 0 Act upon valid output signal
F7.00 Brake Release Delay F7.01 Brake Close Delay
Adjusted according to actual situation
F7.02 Feedback Input Select 25 (11001B) Select contactor feedback and up/down forced Dec. 1 feedback Leveling signal normally open input
88 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Introduction: This chapter gives a list of error codes, including possible causes and solutions. In addition, section 8.2 focuses on elevator related faults and details their causes and drives reaction in those cases.
8.1 Error Codes And Solutions
Upon drive faults, the protection mechanism will act: LED blinks to show the error code, while LCD will display the fault type.
All the possible faults that may occur to EV3100 series drive are listed in Table 8-1. The error code range is E001 ~ E035. Upon drive faults, you can consult this table first, and take detailed note of the fault symptom. You can also contact us or your supplier for technical support.
In Table 8-1, E001 ~ E029 are general drive faults. Upon these faults, the fault relay will act, and drive will cut off PWM output. E030 ~ E035 are elevator related drive faults. See section 8.2 for details.
Table 8-1 Alarms and troubleshooting
Error code Fault type Possible causes Troubleshooting measures
E001 Acc overcurrent 1) over acceleration 2) power network voltage low 3) drive capacity low
1) decrease acceleration rate 2) check the power source 3) replace with a larger capacity drive
E002 Dec overcurrent 1) over deceleration 2) large load invertia torque 3) drive capacity low
1) decrease deceleration rate 2) add proper dynamic braking device 3) replace with a larger capacity drive
E003 Constant speed running overcurrent
1) sudden change of load or load abnormal 2) power network voltage low 3) drive capacity low 4) PG cable broken or faulty in close loop high speed running under vector-control
1) check the load, avoid sudden load change 2) check input power source 3) replace with a larger capacity drive 4) check PG and its wire connection
E004 Acc overvoltage 1) abnormal input voltage 2) restarted a coasting motor
1) check input power source 2) avoid restarting a coasting motor
E005 Dec overvoltage
1) over deceleration 2) large load inertia torque 3) abnormal input voltage
1) decrease deceleration rate 2) use larger dynamic brake 3) check input power source
E006 Constant speed running overvoltage
1) abnormal input voltage 2) large load inertia torque
1) mount an input reactor 2) use a proper dynamic brake
E007 Overvoltage of control power supply
1) abnormal input voltage 2) drive model wrong
1) check input power source 2) reset the model or seek technical support
E008 Phase failure at input side
R, S, T input phase loss 1) check input voltage 2) check cable connection
E009 Phase failure at input side
U, V, W output phase loss (or load seriously asymmetric)
Check output cable connection
E010 Power module faulty
1) drive transient overcurrent 2) short circuit among output phases or grounding short circuit 3) air duct obstructed or fan damaged 4) high ambient temperature 5) poor connection at control board 6) auxiliary power damaged, driving voltage low 7) Bridge shorted within IPM 8) control board abnormal
1) refer to overcurrent solution 2) do rewiring 3) clear the air duct or replace the fan 4) decrease ambient temperature 5) check and re connect 6) seek technical support 7) seek technical support 8) seek technical support
E011 Power module heatsink overheated
1) high ambient temperature 2) air duct obstructed 3) fan damaged 4) power module abnormal
1) decrease ambient temperature 2) clean the air duct 3) replace the fan 4) seek technical support
E012 Reserved - -
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 89
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Error code Fault type Possible causes Troubleshooting measures
E013 Drive overloaded
1) over acceleration 2) restarted a coasting motor 3) power network voltage low 4) overload 5) close loop vector control, PG connection reversed and long term low speed running
1) decrease acceleration rate 2) avoid restarting a coasting motor 3) check power network voltage 4) replace with a larger capacity drive 5) adjust the PG signal direction
E014 Motor overloaded
1) power network voltage low 2) improper motor rated current 3) motor rotation blocked, or sudden load change 4) close loop vector control, PG connection reversed and long term low speed running 5) drive capacity far larger than the load
1) check power network voltage 2) reconfigure motor rated current 3) check the load, adjust torque gain 4) adjust PG signal direction 5) use a proper motor
E015 External equipment fault
“EXT” terminal active check external equipment input
E016 E2PROM read/write faulty
1) control parameters read/write error 2) E2PROM damaged
1) reset by pressing the Stop/Reset key and seek technical support 2) seek technical support
E017 RS485 communication error
1) improper baud rate 2) serial communication error 3) long communication interruption when F0.02 is 4/5
1) reduce baud rate 2) reset by pressing the Stop/Reset key and seek technical support 3) check cable connection of the communication ports
E018 Contactor Not Closed
1) power network voltage low 2) contactor damaged 3) soft start resistor damaged 4) control circuit damaged
1) check power network voltage 2) replace the power circuit contactor or seek technical support 3) replace the soft start resistor or seek technical support 4) seek technical support
E019 Current Detecting Circuit Faulty
1) poor contact of connectors on control board 2) auxiliary power damaged 3) Hall components damaged 4) amplifying circuit abnormal
1) check and secure connector 2) seek technical support 3) seek technical support 4) seek technical support
E020 CPU Faulty DSP R/W error due to serious interference reset by pressing the Stop/Reset key, or install external power filter at input side, or seek technical support
E021 Reserved - - E022 Reserved - -
E023 Keyboard E2PROM R/W Error
1) keyboard control parameters R/W error 2) bad E2PROM
1) reset by pressing the Stop/Reset key, or seek technical support 2) seek technical support Note: this is purely a keypad fault that does not affect drive’s performance. It will not be recorded in the log. You cannot enter Menu system with this fault.
E024 Tuning Error
1) motor capacity imcompatible with drive capacity 2) motor rated parameter misconfigured 3) Parameters resulted from tuning being sharply different from the nominal 3) Tuning timed out
1) replace the drive model 2) set parameters from motor nameplate 3) nil-load the motor and restart tuning 4) check motor connection and parameter setting
E025 PG Faulty 1) PG signal cut off in close loop vector control 2) PG signal reversed in close loop vector control
1) check PG connection and secure it 2) change the value of FA.02 or exchange any two motor phases
E026 Reserved - -
E027 Brake Unit Faulty
1) brake circuit broken or brake pipe damaged 2) external brake resistance too small
1) check the brake, replace a new brake pipe 2) replace with a bigger brake resistor
E028 Parameter Setting Error
1) motor rated parameters misconfigured 2) motor capacity imcompatible with drive capacity 3) PG type setup error in synchronous close loop vector control
1) reconfigure parameters 2) replace the motor 3) change the PG type setup
E029 Reserved - -
90 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Error code Fault type Possible causes Troubleshooting measures
E030 Elevator Overspeed
1) PG pulse number setting error 2) inadequate drive torque 3) speed loop PI parameter setting error
1) check the setting of PG pulse number 2) replace with a larger capacity drive 3) set speed loop PI parameter properly
E031 Reserved - -
E032 Big Minimum Dec. Distance
Curve’s minmum deceleration distance bigger than minimum floor height
Decrease speed setting of distance control curve
E033 Autolearning Error
1) down froced Dec switch does not act at the start 2) REV command during autolearning 3) floor height pulse overflow 4) present position wrong (not at the bottom floor) at the start 5) INS or BAT command input during autolearning 6) PG is zero during autolearning
1) check the down forced Dec switch 2) check elevator control board program 3) increase max. floor height setting 4) reset running or use INI command to initialize the present floor 5) check elevator control program 6) set PG pulse number based on actual conditions
E034 Reserved
E035 Contactor/Brake Error
1) contactor would not close at the start 2) contactor would not release at the stop 3) brake would not open at the start 4) brake would not close at the stop
1) check the contactor and the brake 2) check the connection of contactor/brake feedback switch 3) the interface board damaged. Seek technical support
8.2 Elevator Related Faults
In EV3100 series drives, E030 ~ E035 are elevator related faults. Upon single or multiple faults, the drive will always report the alarm and take corresponding measures. E030 Elevator Overspeed
When elevator speed is detected over 120% of rated speed, the drive will report alarm and prompt E030.
There are three possible causes for E030 alarm:
1. Improper PI parameter setting, overtrim at start up
2. Wrong PG number setting, leading to the miscalculation of feedback speed
3. Elevator out of control due to inadequate drive torque.
Upon this fault, the drive will stop outputting brake control signal BRA-BRC and PWM waveform. At the same time, the fault relay will act. E032 Big Minimum Dec. Distance In distance control, the drive will report fault and prompt E032 when all the six running curves calculated through F4.02 ~ F4.06 and F0.05 are larger than the minimum floor height.
Upon this fault, a standby elevator would not start, and a running elevator will decelerate to stop following the emergency curve.
Upon this fault, the fault relay would not act. E033 Autolearning Error
During autolearning, the drive will report alarm and prompt E033 if control logic or pulse turns wrong.
The drive will prompt E033 when:
1) Bit4 of F7.02 is set to 1, while at the start of autolearning, the DOWN forced deceleration switch does not act.
2) At the start of autolearning, the given running direction is REV.
3) Floor height pulse number is greater than 65535 after frequency division.
4) The elevator is not at the bottom floor when autolearning begins.
5) INS or BAT command is input during autolearning.
6) PG pulse number is zero when autolearning begins.
Upon this fault, a standby elevator would not start, and a running elevator will decelerate to stop following the emergency curve.
Upon this fault, the fault relay would not act. E035 Contactor/Brake Error
When Bit0 of F7.02 is set to 1, the drive will detect contactor fault; when Bit1 of F7.02 is set to 1, the drive will detect brake fault. When either contactor or brake is faulty, the drive will prompt E035.
The drive will prompt E035 when:
1) The drive sends contactor close command and gets ready to start, but detects no contactor close feedback signal.
2) The drive sends contactor release command when stopping, but detects contactor close feedback signal.
3) The drive sends brake release command and gets ready to start, but detects no brake release feedback signal.
4) The drive sends brake close signal when stopping, but detects brake open feedback signal.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 91
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Upon contactor/brake fault, the drive will stop output brake control signal (BRA-BRC) and PWM waveform. The fault relay will act at the same time.
8.3 Fault Reset
After removing the fault, you can use the fault reset function to clear the LED error code and set drive back to normal.
1. In the non-communication control modes (F0.02 = 0, 1, 2, 3), if any of X1 ~ X14 input terminals is set as External Reset Command Input (RST), terminal reset function and keypad reset function will be valid, but host computer reset function will be disabled.
2. In the communication control mode (F0.02 = 4, 5), if any of X1 ~ X14 input terminals is set as External Reset Command Input (RST), the terminal reset function, keypad reset function and host computer reset function are all valid.
Note 1) The reset signal is effective during rising phase of the pulse. 2) In terminal control, to avoid accidents, it is recommended to cut off terminal running command before resetting the fault.
92 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Introduction: This chapter describes precautions of drive storage and maintenance. Section 9.3 explains quick wear parts’ life and their replacements. Please read carefully this chapter and use your drive properly.
Misoperation over a running drive may cause high-volt electricshock!Dangerous high-volt still exists in a drive just powered off.Only trained & authorized personnel can maintain the drive .Before the maintenance, take off all metal objects such as wristwatch and ring. The cloths and tools must meet insulationrequirements.
Danger!
AttentionBefore the maintenance, check the following items before you cantouch the drive's internal parts, or electric shock may occur.
Cut off the drive's power and wait for at least 5mins.
Do not open drive's cover until all keypad indicators are off.The CHARGE indicator at bottom right inside the drive is off.
The voltage between power terminals (+) and (-) is below 36Vdc.
Only professionals can relace drive parts. Do not leave any alienthings in the drive, or fire may occur.
After replacing the control board, set prarameters properly beforerunning the drive.
!
9.1 Routine Maintenance
Potential hazards exist due to aging, wear and tear of drive internal components as well as environmental influences to
the drive, such as temperature, humidity, PH value, particles and vibration. Therefore, the drive and its driving mechanism need routine checking and maintenance during storage and operation.
The drive’s installation and running environment must comply with the regulations specified in this manual.
In daily use, clean the drive internal parts of dust regularly, check for loosened screws, keep the daily operation data, parameter setting and modifications for reference.
Through routine maintenance, you can discover abnormalities, locate the faults and remove them in time to ensure safe operation and prolong the drive service life.
See Table 9-1 for the routine check list.
Table 9-1 Routine check list
Check Items
Content Time Means/Method Criteria
Working environment
1) Temperature, humidity 2) Dust, vapor, water dripping 3) Gases
At any time 1) Point thermometer, hygrometer 2) Observe & smell
1) Ambient temperature lower than 40°C, or derating is a must. Humidity compliant with the related requirement. 2) No dust, no dripping, no condensation 3) No abnormal gases or smell
Drive
1) Vibration 2) Ventilation and temperature 3) Noise
At any time
1) Observe 2) Point thermometer and observe 3) Listen
1) Smooth operation without vibration 2) Normal fan operation, with normal wind speed and volume. No abnormally hot parts 3) No abnormal noise
Motor 1) Vibration 2) Heat 3) Noise
At any time 1) Watch and listen 2) Point thermometer 3) Listen
1) No abnormal vibration or sound 2) No abnormally hot parts 3) No abnormal noise
Operation state parameters
1) Input voltage 2) Output voltage 3) Output current 4) Internal temperature
At any time
1) Voltmeter 2) Rectifying voltmeter3) Ammeter 4) Point thermometer
Refer to the related specification Refer to the related specification Refer to the related specification Temperature rise by no more than 40 C
Chapter 9 Maintenance 93
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
9.2 Periodic Maintenance
In terms of application environment, you need to check the drive regularly at the interval of 3 ~ 6 months or less to ensure long and safe operation of the drive.
Note 1. Only authorized technicians can maintain the drive. 2. No iron ware such as screw, washer, cable or tools should be left inside the drive, or the drive may be damaged. 3. Do not take the liberty of altering driver internal components or layout. 4. Do not touch directly the electrostatic sensitive IC elements on the control board. Check points:
1. Check and secure the screws on control terminals
2. Check the power circuit terminals and wires for bad connection or overheating.
3. Is there any damage on power cables, especially screatches on cable insulation layers?
4. Is the insulation tape on power cable lugs still fine?
5. Check and clean (with vacuum cleaner) the dust off PCB and air duct.
6. Before the direct-to-ground test, remove all drive-mains & drive-motor connections and connect all the power circuit input/output terminals to the ground.
1) Make sure that the 500V megohmmeter (or suitable insulation tester) is faultless.
2) Insulation test of single power circuit terminal to ground is forbidden, for it may damage the drive.
3) Insulation test to control terminals is also forbidden, for it may damage the drive.
4) After the test, do remove all the shorting wires connected to the power circuit terminals.
7. Before the motor insulation test, you must disconnect the motor from the drive, or the drive may be damaged.
EV3100 drive
U V W
PE
R S T
Control board
P1 (+) (-) PB
Mega-ohm meter
Figure 9-1 Drive insulation test
AttentionDrive's dielectric strength has been tested in the factory. Do nottest again, or damage may occur.
!
9.3 Quick Wear Parts
The quick wear parts of drive include the cooling fan and filtering electrolyte capacitor, whose service life depends on application environment and maintenance.
Component Service life Fan 30 ~ 40 thousand hs
Electrolyte capacitor 40 ~ 50 thousand hs To ensure normal operation, you need to replace the quick wear components at regular intervals.
The new component to be used should be of the same model as the old one.
Attention!The new parts should be of the same model and electric spec.with the old, or the drive may be damaged.
The replacement interval should be determined by the actual running hour of your drive. However, if a component is faulty through checking, replace it right away.
1. Cooling fan
Possible failure causes: bearing wear-out, vane aging
Criterion:
When drive is cut off power, check the vanes and other fan parts for cracks and any abnormalities.
When the drive is on, check the fan running state for abnormal vibration.
2. Electrolyte capacitor
Possible failure causes: electrolyte aging due to ripple current increase caused by high ambient temperature and frequent load change
Criterion: 1) Whether overvoltage/current at drive’s loaded startup is frequent. 2) Any capacitor liquid leakage. 3) Is the safety valve popped out? 4) Check the static capacitance and insulation resistance.
9.4 Storage
Attention!The power-on of a drive that has been idle for more than 2 yearsreqiures slow voltage rise with a booster, otherwise electricshock or explosion may occur.
1. Requirements on storage environment are in Table 9-2.
94 Chapter 9 Maintenance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Table 9-2 Storage environment
Item Requirement Remark
Ambient temp.
-40°C ~ +70°C
Ambient temp. should be lower than 30 C for long term storage, or capacitor performance may deteriate
Free from condensing or frozen environment
Relative humidity
5 ~ 95%rh Protective measures including plastic film coverage and use of desiccant
Others No direct sunlight, no dust, no corrosive/explosive gases, no oil fog, no vapor and water dripping, no vibration and little salty substance
2. Electrolyte capacitor deteriorates in performance after long term storage, therefore should be energized regularly for preservation.
If the drive is to be idle for a long time, it is recommended to energize it for more than 0.5hr every 6 months lest its components should become unusable.
9.5 Warranty
Emerson Network Power will provide warranty repair services for any of the following occurs to the drive:
The drives are guaranteed against defects for a period of 18-month from the date of delivery from the manufacturer. After 18 months, repairs will be charged.
However, even within the 18-month warranty period, repair cost will be charged in the following cases:
1) Damage caused by misoperation – not following manual guidance
2) Damage due to fire, blood or abnormal voltage
3) Damage due to abnormal application of the drive
3. Service charges will be calculated based on actual costs. If there is any service contract, the contract prevails.
Chapter 9 Maintenance 95
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Chapter 10 Accessories
Introduction: This chapter describes the specs. and functions of drive’s accessories. You can select them according to your actual need.
10.1 Braking Assembly
The EV3100 drives of 22kW or below (including 22kW) have built-in braking units. You only need to mount a braking resistor. For drives of 30kW or above, both external braking unit and braking resistor are needed.
Table 10-1 Brake components spec.
Motor rated power (kW)
Drive model
EV3100-
Braking resistor spec.
Braking torque
(%)
Braking unit model
5.5 4T0055E 1600W/65 200 Built-in 7.5 4T0075E 1600W/50 200 Built-in 11 4T0110E 4800W/40 200 Built-in 15 4T0150E 4800W/32 180 Built-in
18.5 4T0185E 6000W/28 190 Built-in 22 4T0220E 9600W/20 200 Built-in 30 4T0300E 9600W/16 180 TDB-4C01-0300
10.1.1 Braking Unit Model
TDB 4C01 0150
Brake assembly
Voltage level
220V380V660V
246
Standardmotor power
Referencenumber
Referencenumber
15kW30kW55kW
015003000550
Brake unit Figure 10-1 Braking unit model description
10.1.2 Braking Unit Dimensions
EMERSON
TDB-4C01-0300
144mm
254mm
143mm Figure 10-2 Braking unit dimensions
10.1.3 Function And Wiring
1. Main functions
Adjustable brake voltage, overtime protection, heat-sink overheat protection, module abnormal alarm, fault display,
faul relay output, braking resistor overheat disconnection and relay alarm output.
The cable between braking unit and drive, or between braking unit and braking resistor should be within 5m. If the cable is between 5m ~ 10m, use twisted pair.
2. Wiring of braking unit and resistor
MRST
UVWPE
(-) (+)
PBP
N
TA
TB
TC
P
PB
TH1
TH2
Brake unit Brake unit
EV3100
Figure 10-3 Drive and braking assembly connection
10.2 AC/DC Reactor & Power Factor
Regulator
Table 10-2 Input AC reactor configuration
EV3100 drive model Input AC reactor model EV3100-4T0055E EV3100-4T0075E
TDL-4AI01-0075
EV3100-4T0110E EV3100-4T0150E
TDL-4AI01-0150
EV3100-4T0185E EV3100-4T0220E
TDL-4AI01-0220
EV3100-4T0300E TDL-4AI01-0370
Table 10-3 Output AC reactor configuration
EV3100 drive model Output AC reactor model EV3100-4T0055E EV3100-4T0075E
TDL-4AO01-0075
EV3100-4T0110E EV3100-4T0150E
TDL-4AO01-0150
EV3100-4T0185E EV3100-4T0220E
TDL-4AO01-0220
EV3100-4T0300E TDL-4AO01-0370
Table 10-4 DC reactor configuration
EV3100 drive model DC reactor model EV3100-4T0150E TDL-4DI01-0150 EV3100-4T0185E EV3100-4T0220E
TDL-4DI01-0220
EV3100-4T0300E TDL-4DI01-0370
96 Chapter 10 Accessories
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Table 10-5 Input passive PFC configuration
EV3100 drive model Input passive PFC model EV3100-4T0055E EV3100-4T0075E
TDL-4PF01-0075
EV3100-4T0110E EV3100-4T0150E
TDL-4PF01-0150
EV3100-4T0185E EV3100-4T0220E
TDL-4PF01-0220
EV3100-4T0300E TDL-4PF01-0370
10.3 EMI Filter
Table 10-6 I/O filter configuration
Drive model TD3400-
Input filter Output filter
EV3100-4T0055E EV3100-4T0075E
EV-25EB/XY EV-25EBL/XY
EV3100-4T0110E EV3100-4T0150E
EV-35EB/XY EV-35EBL/XY
EV3100-4T0185E EV3100-4T0220E
EV-50EB/XY EV-50EBL/XY
EV3100-4T0300E EV-65EB/XY EV-65EBL/XY
Note: */XY is the type of filter connection terminal
/10 = screw
/30 = PHOENIX terminal
/40 = connection terminal block
10.4 Communication Software
Communication software: TDS-DW32.
10.5 Keyboard Cables & Adapter
Cable: TDC-CB0030, where the “0030” is the length (unit: m).
Keypad adapter: TDK-AM01
If you need a keypad adapter, the optional cable lengths include: 15m, 30m, 50m, 100m. Otherwise, the options are 1.5m and 3m.
10.6 Serial Communication Protocol
Our serial communication protocol is reprogrammable. You can further develop it by yourself. See Appendix 2 Communication Protocol.
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance 97
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance
For your reference, this section introduces drive EMC design and installation instruction. The covered topics include: 1) Noise suppression. 2) Wiring. 3) Grounding. 4) Surge absorption by external equipment. 5) Current leakage. 6) Classification of safety areas and installation instructions. 7) Power source filter application. 8) Radiated noise handling.
1 Noise Suppression
Drives inevitably generate noise due to its operation principle. The effect of noise distutbance depends on the noise type, transmission paths, as well as the design, installation, wiring and grounding of the drive system.
1.1 Noise Type
See the following figure.
ESD inductionnoise
Route 1
⋯⋯
Earthing noise
Noise type
Conductionnoise
Motorradiation
noise
Transmissionnoise in space
Route 7, 8
⋯⋯
Electromagneticinducted noise
Route 2
⋯⋯
Route 3
⋯⋯
Transmissionnoise of
power cables
Driveradiation
noise
Power cableradiation
noise
Route 4
⋯⋯
Route 5
⋯⋯
Route 6
⋯⋯
Figure 1 Noise type
1.2 Transmission Paths
See the following figure.
⑧
⑤
⑥
④
③
③
④
⑦
②
①
⑤
SensorMotor
Sensorpower supply
Phone
DriveRadio Meter
Figure 2 Noise transmission paths
1.3 Noise Suppression Methods
The methods of noise suppression are listed in the table below:
98 Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Table 1 Noise suppression methods
Noise transmission
path Possible disturbance Suppression method
1) 7) 8)
When the signal cables are parallel to, or bound together with the power cables, the static and electromagnetic induction will cause the noise transmit through the signal cable, misoperating the related equipment.
1) Avoid laying the signal cables parallel to the power cable, or binding them together. 2) Keep the susceptible peripheral equipment away from the drive. 3) Keep the susceptible signal cables away from drive’s I/O cables. 4) Use shielded cable as the signal and power cable. In addition, you can put the cable into metal tubes. Keep the tube-to-tube clearance at least 20cm.
2)
If a loop is formed between peripheral equipment and the drive cables, the grounding leakage of the drive will misoperate the equipment.
Removing the grounding of the peripheral equipment will solve the problem.
3)
When peripheral equipment shares the same power source with the drive, the noise transmitted trough the power line may misoperate the peripheral equipment.
Mount a noise filter at drive input side, or isolate the peripheral equipment with an isolated transformer or power filter.
4) 5) 6)
Electronic equipment such as computers, measuring meters, radio equipment and sensors, when in the same cabinet with drive, with their wiring close to the drive, may misoperate due to radio interference.
1) Put the susceptible peripheral equipment and their signal cables away from the drive. Use shielded cable as the signal wire. Ground the shielding coat. Protect the signal cable with a metal tube and keep it off the drive’s I/O cable. When crossing of the signal line and drive I/O cable is inevitable, make it orthogonal. 2) Mount radio noise filter or linear noise filter (ferrite common-mode choke) to the input/output side of the drive to suppress the radio noise. 3) The shielding coat for the drive - motor cable should be thick. Lay the cable in a tube thicker than 2mm or bury it in a cement conduit. The cable should be through a metal pipe, and has its shielding coat grounded. You may use a 4-core cable as the motor power cable. One core should be grounded at the drive side at one end, and be connected to the motor’s PE at the other end.
2 Wiring Requirement
1) Control cables, input power cables and motor cables should be laid separately, and kept away from each other, as shown in Figure 3 (a). When crossing is inevitable, make it orthogonal, as shown in Figure 3 (b).
Motor cable
power cable
>50cm
>30cm
>20cm
Control signal cable
a) Parallel wiring
Power/motor cable
Control signal cable
b) Orthogonal crossing
Figure 3 Wiring requirement
2) The bigger the cable sectional area is, the bigger the grounding capacitance will be, and in turn, the bigger grounding leakage current will be. Therefore, when the motor cable cable sectional area is too big, derate the motor to decrease the output current (reduce the current by 5% when the sectional area is one grade bigger).
3) High-frequency low-resistance shielded/armored cables should be used.
4) Generally the control cables should be shielded and the shielding metal net must be connected to the metal enclosure of the drive through ring joints. See Figure 4.
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance 99
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
PE PE
Enclosure Enclosure
Figure 4 Correct shield grounding
PE
PE
Enclosure Enclosure
Figure 5 Incorrect shield grounding
3 Grounding
3.1 Grounding Methods
DriveOther
equipment
PE
DriveOther
equipment
PE
a) Dedicated earthing (recommended) b) Shared earthing (acceptable)
c) Shared earthing (unacceptable) d) Shared earthing (unacceptable)
DriveOther
equipment
PE
Drive Otherequipment
PE
Figure 6 Dedicated grounding terminal
Among the 4 grounding modes shown in Figure 6, (a) is the best one. We suggest you use this mode.
3.2 Grounding Cable Connection Instructions
1) To ensure minimum grounding resistance, use grounding cables with standard cross section. With the same sectional area, a flat cable should be preferred for it has lower high frequency impedance than a round cable.
2) The grounding point should be near the drive, because the grounding cable should be as short as possible.
3) For a 4-core motor cable, one core should be grounded at the drive side at one end, and be connected to the motor’s PE at the other end. However, the best grounding effect can be achieved if the motor and drive each has its own grounding pole.
4) If the grounding poles of different equipment in one control system are connected together, the leakage current will be a noise source that disturbs the whole system. Therefore, the drive’s grounding pole should be separated from the grounding poles of other equipment such as audio equipment and sensors.
5) In order to lower the high-frequency impedance, the fixing bolts of various equipment can be used as the high-frequency terminal that is connected to the cabinet rear panel. Note that the insulation paint must be removed.
100 Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
6) The grounding cables should be laid away from the I/O cables of noise-sensitive equipment. Note that the grounding cable should be as short as possible.
4 Installation Of Surge Absorber
When noise-generating devices such as relay, contact and magnetic brake are used, wherever they are installed, surge absorbers must be used.
220Vac
Varistor
Diode
Drive
220Vac
RC-filter
+24Vdc
Figure 7 Surge absorber for noise-generating device
5 Leakage Current And Its Handling Method
Leakage current, including ground leakage current and inter-cable leakage current, flows through drive’s line capacitor at I/O side and motor’s capacitor. As shown in Figure 8, the current strength depends on the carrier frequency and capacitance value.
Input powerDrive
Inter-line capacitance
Motor
Cable-earth capacitance
Motor-earthcapacitance
R
S
T
MCCB
Figure 8 Leakage current path
5.1 Ground Leakage Current
The ground leakage current will flow not only into the drive, but also other equipment through the grounding cable. It may misoperate equipment such as relays and leakage breakers. The higher/longer the drive carrier frequency/motor cable is, the larger the leakage current will be.
Suppressing method: Reduce the carrier frequency, shorten the motor cable, and use leakage breaker designed particularly for high-order harmonics/surge leakage current.
5.2 Inter-cable Leakage Current
The leakage current that flows through the capacitor among drive output cables may generate high-order harmonic that can misoperate the external thermal relay. The small capacity drives (7.5kW or smaller) with output cables longer than 50m is particularly apt to misoperate the external thermal relay.
Suppression method: lower the carrier frequency, mount a reactor at drive’s AC output side, or, as recommended, use a temperature sensor to monitor the motor, or use the drive’s motor overload protection function (electronic thermal relay) to replace the external thermal relay.
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance 101
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
6 Suppression Of Drive Radiation
Usually drives are installed in metal control cabinets, the cables led out from the cabinet are the main radiation source, it is critical to make special treatment at the cable outlet.
As shown in Figure 9, the cables let out from the cabinet serve as an antenna, which transmits the radiation received inside the cabinet to the outside space. In Figure 10, the cables’ shielding coat is connected to the cabinet ground, so that the radiation is directed to the ground.
Cable
Shielded enclosure
PCB
Figure 9 Radiation transmitted through cables
Cable
Shielded enclosure
PCB
Connect cable shieldingcoat to the enclosure atcable outlet
Figure 10 Suppression of radiation transmitted through cables
The suppression method shown in Figure 10 requires the grounding of cable shidling coat be as close to the outlet as possible, or the cable between the outlet and the grounding point can still cause radiation. To be exact, the grounding point and outlet distance should be smaller than 15cm, and the shorter the better.
7 Power Line Filter Application Instruction
Power line filter should be used in the equipment that may generate strong EMI, or in the equipment that is sensitive to EMI.
7.1 Effect Of Power Line Filter
1) Power line filter is a bi-directional low-pass filter that allows the passage of only DC current and 50Hz mains frequency current. For EMI current is of high frequency, power line filter can isolate the EMI.
2) Power line filer helps the equipment meet the EMC requirement on conducted emission and electromagnetic susceptibility. It also suppresses the radiated disturbance of the equipment.
7.2 Power Line Filter Installation Instruction
1) Inside the cabinet, the filter should be mounted close to the power cable inlet. The filter’s own power cable in the cabinet should be as short as possible.
2) If the filter input and output cables are laid too close to each other, the high-frequency EMI will bypass the filter by coupling directly through the filer input and output cables. Make sure this situation does not happen.
3) Usually there is a dedicated grounding terminal at filter’s case. But note that you cannot use a wire to connect the grounding terminal to the cabinet, for the high-frequency impedance of the wire will make the grounding useless. You should
102 Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
adhere the filter case directly to the cabinet and make the contact area as big as possible. Remember to remove the insulation paint to ensure good electric contact.
8 Drive EMC Installation Area Classification
In the drive system, the drive and peripheral equipment such as control devices and sensors are usually mounted in the same cabinet. You can suppress the interference from inside the cabinet by installing radio noise filter and AC resistor at the cabinet inlet. EMC is also required within the cabinet.
In the drive-motor drive system, the drive, braking unit and contactor are all strong noise sources that can affect the normal operation of sensitive peripheral equipments such as sensors. You can install the peripheral equipments in different EMC areas according to their electrical natures to isolate them from the noise source. This is the best way to reduce interference.
The drive EMC installation areas are classified as shown in the following figure.
Input Filter
Drive
Sensor (e.g., oftemp, pressure)
Controlequipment(e.g., PC),
Electric cabinetArea V
Area III
Area I
Mechanicalsystem
Motor and its cables
Area VI
Motor
Input reactor
Area II
Linearnoise filter
Grounded plate
Area IV
Mains
Detecting signal line
Motor cable
Figure 11 Drive EMC installation area classification
The following is the description of the installation area classification.
1) Area I: transformer for control power supply, control system and sensor
2) Area II: interface for control signal and cables. The devices mounted here should have certain immunity level.
3) Area III: noise generating devices such as input reactor, drive, braking unit and contactors.
4) Area IV: output noise filter
5) Area V: Power source (including the cables connecting the radio noise filter)
6) Area VI: Motor and its cables
Areas should be isolated in space, at least 20cm away from each other, and divided by grounded plates, to achieve electro-magnetic decoupling effect. Put cables from different areas into different cable tubes. Mount the filters, if needed, at the interfaces of various areas. All bus cables (RS485, for example) and signal cables led out from the cabinet must be shielded.
9 Drive Electrical Installation Instruction
The drive electrical installation is shown below:
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance 103
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Motor
Metal cabinet
AC input reactor
Metal cabinetPLC ormeters
MCB
AC outputreactor
>30cm
>50cm
Drive
Motorcable
Control cable
>20cm
Drive power cableIsolation transformer
Power cable of meters
Mains cable
Filter
Figure 12 Drive electrical installation
To meet EMC requirements, note the following during installation:
1) Mount the drive in a cabinet, with it bottom as well as the casing of its peripheral equipment fixed to the back board of the cabinet. Ensure good electric contact between them. Make the drive-filter distance smaller than 15cm and as small as possible, so that you can minimize the high-frequency impedance of the drive-filter grounding cable, and subsequently reduce the high-frequency noise.
2) Mount a grounding bar at the inlet of control cabinet (anywhere within 5cm). Connect to this bar the shielding coats of all cables that are led into the cabinet through ring joints to ensure good electric contact.
3) It is recommended to use the spiral-metal-tape & metal-net double-shielded cable as the motor cable. The shielding coat should be connected at the drive side to the cabinet backboard through ring joints as shown in Figure 4. On end should be connected to somewhere within 15cm near the drive, the other, to the earthing bar.
The shielding coat of motor cable at motor terminal box should be connected to the motor metal enclosure through ring joints. You can also braid the shielding coat and flatten it (width-length ratio should be bigger than 20%). Connect the flattened braid to the motor grounding terminal. The cable core and the shielding braid are the shorter the better. Make them shorter than 5cm if possible.
4) The terminal control cable must be shielded. The shileding coat should be connected to the grounding bar at cabinet inlet through ring joints. At the drive side the shielding coat can be connected to the drive metal enclosure through a grounding clamp. You can also braid the shielding coat, flatten it and connect it to the drive PE terminal. The shielding braid and bare part of the cable core are the shorter the better. Make them shorter than 15cm if possible.
5) The keypad cable must stay within the shielded cabinet.
6) The openings of the shielded cabinet should be as small as possible, no bigger than 15cm.
10 Satisfied EMC Standards
After being mounted with proper I/O filter, AC reactor (for filter and reactor models, see Chapter 10 Accessories), and with the wiring instructions observed, EV3100 drives can meet the EMC standards as listed in Table 1-2.
Table 2 EV3100 drive EMC performance
Item Satisfied standard Standard grade Conducted Emissions IEC61800-3 Requirement on the first environment Radiated Emissions IEC61800-3 Requirement on the first environment
Harmonic Current Emissions IEC61000-3-2 (< 16A) IEC61000-3-4 (≥ 16A)
104 Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Item Satisfied standard Standard grade
Immunity To Electrostatic Discharge IEC61000-4-2 Criterion B (contact discharge 4000V, air discharge 6000V)
Immunity To Radiated Electric Fields IEC61000-4-3 Level 3, criterion A (10V/m) Immunity To Electrical Fast Transient/Bursts
IEC61000-4-4 Level 4, criterion B (power terminal 4kV/2.5kHz, signal terminal 2kV/5kHz)
Immunity To Surges IEC61000-4-5 Criterion B (common mode 10kV, differential mode 2kV)
Immunity To Continuous Conducted Interference
IEC61000-4-6 Criterion A (10V/m)
Immunity To Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions And Voltage Variations
IEC61000-4-11 Dips and interruptions: 0 ~ 70% Un, criterion C
Appendix 1 Drive EMC Installation Guidance 105
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
1 Network Topology
RS232
Master: PC
RS485
Master: PLC
EV3100 PV2000 EV1000 EV2000
RS232
EV3100
Single master and multi-slave Single master single slave
or
RS485
RS232
EV3100
232-485adapter
232-485adapter
Master: PC Master: PC
Figure 13 Drive network topology
2 Interfaces
RS485 or RS232: asynchronous, half-duplex.
Default: 8-N-2, 19200bps. See Group FF parameter settings.
3 Communication Modes
1) The protocol is Modbus protocol. Besides the common register Read/Write operation, it is supplemented with commands of parameters management.
2) The drive is a slave in the network. It communicates in ‘point to point’ master-slave mode. It will not respond to the command sent by the master via broadcast address.
3. In the case of multi-drive communication or long-distance transmission, connecting a 100~120Ω resistor in parallel with the master signal line will help to enhance the immunity to interference.
4 Protocol Format
Modbus protocol supports both RTU and ASCII mode. The frame format is illustrated as follows:
Start, at least 3.5 bitsof vacancy
Slaveaddress
Functioncode Data Check End, at least 3.5
bits of vacancy
Modbus data frame
RTU mode
Start: "0×3A" Slaveaddress
Functioncode Data Check End: "0 ×D, 0 ×A"
Modbus data frame
ASCII mode
Figure 14 Protocol format
106 Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Modbus adopts “Big Endian” representation for data frame. This means that when a numerical quantity larger than a byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first.
RTU mode
In RTU mode, the idle time between frames is decided by the bigger value between parameter setting and the Modbus minimum idle time.
The minimum Modbus idle time between frames should be no less than 3.5 bytes. The checksum adopts CRC-16 method. All data except checksum itself sent will be counted into the calculation. Please refer to section: CRC Check for more information. Note that at least 3.5 bytes of Modbus idle time should be kept, and the start and end idle time need not be summed up to it.
The table below shows the data frame of reading parameter 002 from Drive No. 1.
Address Function
code Register address
Quantity of inputs
Checksum
0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x25 0xCA The table below shows the reply frame from Drive No.1.
Address ParameterReply bytes
Register content
Checksum
0x01 0x03 0x02 0x00 0x00 0xB8 0x44 ASCII mode
In ASCII mode, the frame head is “0x3A”, and default frame tail is “0x0D” or “0x0A”. The frame tail can also be configured by users. Except frame head and tail, other bytes will be sent as two ASCII characters, first sending higher nibble and then lower nibble. The data have 7 bits. “A”~“F” corresponds to the ASCII code of respective capital letter. LRC check is used. LRC is calculated by adding all the successive 8-bit bytes of the message except the head and tail, discarding any carriers, and then two’s complementing the result.
Example of Modbus data frame in ASCII mode:
The command frame of writing “1000 (0x3E8)” into Register 003 of Drive No. 1 is shown in the table below:
LRC checksum = the complement of (01+06+00+03+0x03+0xE8) = 0x48
Frame head Address function code r Register Address Content written check sum Frame tailCode 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 F A 0 4 8 CR LF
ASCII 3A 30 31 30 36 30 30 30 33 30 33 45 38 30 42 0D 0A
5 Protocol function
Different respond delay can be set through drive’s parameters to adapt to different needs. For RTU mode, the respond delay should be no less than 3.5 bytes interval, and for ASCII mode, no less than 1ms.
The main function of Modbus is to read and write parameters. The Modbus protocol supports the following function codes:
Function code Function
0x03 Read drive’s parameter and operation status parameters
0x06 Modify single drive’s parameter or control parameters. Not save them upon power-off.
0x08 Serial line diagnosis
0x10 Modify several drives’ parameter or control parameters. Not save them upon power-off.
0x41 Modify single drive’s parameter or control parameters. Saving them upon power-off.
0x42 Parameter management All drive’s parameters, control and status parameters are mapped to Modbus R/W Register. The R/W properties of the parameters and their setting ranges are specified in the user manual. The group number of the drive’s parameter maps to the most significant byte of the register address, and the index number of the parameter in the group maps to the least significant byte. The control and status parameters
of the drive are virtually taken as parameter group. The relationship of group number of the parameters and the most significant byte of register address is listed below:
F0 group: 0x00. F1 group: 0x01. F2 group: 0x02.
F3 group: 0x03. F4 group: 0x04. F5 group: 0x05.
F6 group: 0x06. F7 group: 0x07. F8 group: 0x08.
F9 group: 0x09. FA group: 0x0A.
Drive control parameter group: 0x32.
Drive status parameter group: 0x33.
For example, the register address of F3.02: 0x302, register address of FA.01: 0xA01.
The above shows the format of the frame. Now we will introduce the Modbus function code and data unit for different function in details, which is called protocol data unit for simplicity. Also MSB stands for the most significant byte and LSB stands for the least significant byte for the same reason. The description below is data format in RTU mode. The length of data unit in ASCII mode should be doubled.
Protocol data unit format of reading parameters:
Request format:
Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range Function code 1 0x03 Initial register address
2 0x0000~0xFFFF
Register number 2 0x0001~0x0004 Response format:
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol 107
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range Function code 1 0x03 Number of bytes read out 1 2*Register Qty.Contents 2*Register Qty. If the operation fails, error code and exception code forming the protocol data unit will be replied. The error code is (Parameter+0x80). The exception code denotes cause of the error; see the table below.
Table 1 Exception code list Exception code Meaning
0x1 Invalid parameter. 0x2 Invalid register address. 0x3 Data error, exceeding upper or lower limit
0x4 Drive operation failure, including invalid data, although within upper and lower limit.
0x5 Valid command, processing, mainly used in storing data into non-volatile memory.
0x6 Drive busy, please try later. Mainly used in storing data into non-volatile memory.
0x18 Information frame error, including data length or checksum error.
0x20 Parameter cannot be modified 0x21 Parameter cannot be modified during operation 0x22 Parameter protected by password.
Protocol data unit format of modifying single drive’s parameter:
Request format: Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range
Parameter 1 0x06 Register Address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF Register content 2 0x0000~0xFFFF Response format: Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range
Parameter 1 0x06 Register Address 2 0x0000~0xFFFF Register content 2 0x0000~0xFFFF If the operation fails, error code and exception code will be replied. The error code is (Parameter+0x80). The exception code denotes cause of the error; see Table 1.
Protocol data unit format of serial line diagnosis:
Request format: Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range
Function code 1 0x08 Sub-function code 2 0x0000~0x0030 Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF Response format: Protocol data unit Data length(bytes) Range
Function code 1 0x08
Sub-function code 2 0x0000~0x0030 Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF
If the operation fails, error code and exception code will be replied. The error code is 88H. The exception code denotes cause of the error. See Table 1.
Sub-function of line diagnosis: Sub-function
code Data
(request)Data
(respond) Meaning
0x0000 0x0000 0x0001
0xFF00 0xFF00
Initialize the communication, disable no-reply mode
0x0003
“new frame tail” and “00” occupy the MSB and LSB
“new frame tail” and “00” occupy the MSB and LSB
To set frame tail in ASCII mode. It will replace the old line feed character. It will not be saved upon power-off. Note: it must not be greater than 0x7F, nor equal to 0x3A.
0x0004 0x0000 No response
To set no-response mode, so the drive respond only to “initialize communication” request. It is to isolate the faulty drive.
0x0000 0x0000 Drive not respond to error or invalid command
0x0030 0x0001 0x0001
Drive responds to error or invalid command
Protocol data unit format of modifying several drive’s parameter and status parameters:
Request format: Protocol data unit Data length (bytes) Range
Function code 1 0x10 Initial register address 2 0x0000~0xFFFFRegister Qty. 2 0x0001~0x0004Register bytes number 1 2* Register Qty.Register contents 2* Register Qty. Response format: Protocol data unit Data length (bytes) Range
Function code 1 0x10 Initial Register Address 2 0x0000~0xFFFFRegister Qty. 2 0x0001~0x0004 The request is to modify a continuous data units starting from the initial register address. The register address maps to drive’s parameter and control parameter. See their relationship in Table 2 and Table 3 below. If the operation fails, please refer the error messages to Table 1.
When storing several register parameters, the drive will start from the lowest address of the register to the highest address. It is a consecutive process. Only when all the parameters are stored successively, can the operation be successful, otherwise, it will return from the first address where the operation fails.
Parameter 0x41 is to modify single drive’ parameter or control parameter and save it in a non-volatile memory. The format is similar with that of 0x06. The only difference is that
108 Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
0x41 parameter is saved upon power failure, while 0x06 not. Since some of the control parameters cannot be saved in the non-volatile memory, the two commands in this case have the same effect. Those parameters will be introduced later.
The management of parameters includes reading out the upper and lower limit of the parameters, parameters properties, max. index number of a parameter group, next or previous parameter group number, currently displayed status parameter index, or display the next status parameter. Parameter property includes R/W property, parameter unit, scaling and so on. These commands are helpful to provide information about parameter’s range and properties that are necessary for modifying parameters remotely. The protocol data unit of parameter management is as follows:
Request format: Protocol data unit Data length (bytes) Range Function code 1 0x42 Sub-function code 2 0x0000~0x0007
Data 2 It depends on drive’s type
Response format: Protocol data unit Data length (bytes) Range Function code 1 0x42 Sub-function code 2 0x0000~0x0007 Data 2 0x0000~0xFFFF If the operation fails, error codes and exception code will be replied. The exception code is shown in Table 1.
Sub-function of parameter management: Sub-function
code Data (request)
Data (respond)
Meaning
0x0000
Parameter group number and index within a group occupy the MSB and LSB.
Upper limit of a parameter.
Read the upper limit of a parameter
0x0001
Parameter group number and index within a group occupy the MSBand LSB.
Lower limit of a parameter
Read the lower limit of a parameter
0x0002
Parameter group number and index within a group occupy the MSB and LSB.
Parameter property, see description below
Read out Parameter property
0x0003
Parameter group number occupies the MSB and the LSB is “00”.
Max. index within a parameter group
Read max. index within a parameter group
0x0004
Parameter group number occupies the MSB and the LSB is “00”.
Next parameter group number takes the higher byte and lower byte is “00”.”
Read next parameter group number
0x0005 Parameter group Last Parameter Read
Sub-function code
Data (request) Data
(respond) Meaning
number occupies the MSB and the LSB is “00”.
group number occupies the MSB and the LSB is “00”.
previous parameter group number
0x0006 0x3300
Currently displayed status parameter index
Read currently displayed status parameter index
0x0007 0x3300 Next status parameter index
Display next status parameter
The status parameter group cannot be modified nor support upper or lower limit read-out operation.
Parameter property is 2 bytes in length. The definitions of its bits are as follows:
Parameter property (Bit)
Value Meaning
000B No decimal part 010B One digit of decimal 011B Two digits of decimal 100 Three digits of decimal
Bit2~Bit0
Others Reserved Bit3 Reserved
00B Modification step is “1” Bit5~Bit4
Others Reserved 01B Modifiable 10B Cannot be modified during running 11B Set by factory, cannot be modified Bit7~Bit6
00B Actual parameters, cannot be modified
0000B No unit 0001B Unit: Hz 0010B Unit: A 0011B Unit: V 0100B Unit: r/min 0101B Unit: m/s 0110B Unit: %
Bit11~Bit8
Others Reserved 1 Upper limit is active every nibble
Bit12 0 Upper limit is active as a whole word
Bit15~Bit13 Reserved Drive control parameters cover the drive start/stop, frequency setting and so on. Through the status parameters, present frequency, output current and output torque can be retrieved. The control and status parameters are listed below:
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol 109
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
EV3100 drive’s control parameter index:
Register address
Parameter Save upon power-off
0x3200 Control command word No
0x3201 Main reference The main reference is floor signal or speed setup
EV3100 drive’s status parameter index:
Register address
Parameter
x3301 Actual value of the current main reference x3302 Drive model x3303 Drive type x3304 Software version x3305 Running speed x3306 Output current x3307 Output voltage x3308 Power output x3309 Rotation speed
0x330A Output frequency 0x330B Preset speed 0x330C Rated speed 0x330D Present floor 0x330E Present position 0x330F DC bus voltage
0x3310 Input terminal block 1 status (0: OFF 1: ON)
0x3311 Input terminal block 2 status (0: OFF 1: ON)
0x3312 Input terminal block 3 status (0: OFF 1: ON)
0x3313 Output terminal block 0x3314 Analog input 0x3315 Analog input 0x3316 Pre-torque compensation 0x3317 Torque bias balance adjust 0x3318 Torque bias gain adjust 0x3319 Analog output 1 value 0x331A Analog output 2 value 0x331B Rated speed deceleration distance 0x331C Output torque 0x331D Curve’s minimum running distance 0x331E Speed difference 0x331F Magnetic pole position
Note: Drive (slave) model code principle: range: 0 ~ 9999, the thousand’s and hundred’s place denote drive series category, such as “TD”, “EV”; ten’s and unit place for drive series, such as “1000”, “2000” or “3100”. For example, the model code of TDXXXX is: 0*1000+0*100+XXXX/100 model code of EVXXXX: 1*1000+0*100+XXXX/100; model code of PVXXXX: 1*1000+0*100+XXXX/100+1.
Bit definition of drive control word Control word (bit)
Value Meaning Function
1 Running command valid
This bit co-work with drive’s enable bit to run the drive. The drive will close the running contactor, release the brake and start to run. This bit becomes invalid only after the drive stops.
bit0
0 Running command invalid
1 Run REV/DOWN
Elevator running direction. The same function as terminal FWD/REV
bit1
0 Run FWD/UP
1 No emergency stop
Drive runs normally bit2
0 Emergency stop Controller controls drive to stop
1 Drive enable Indicates controller state: normal or faulty. The same function as terminal EN
bit3
0 Drive disable
1 New running speed is set
Indicates a change in running speed, as determined by main reference bit4
0 No new running speed
Keep present speed
1 New destination floor is set
Indicates a change in destination floor, as determined by main reference. The same function as terminal FLE
bit5
0 No new destination floor
No change in destination floor
1 Reset valid Drive’s fault has been reset bit6
0 Reset invalid
1 Main reference of this frame is destination floor
Main reference of this frame is destination floor
bit7
0 Main reference of this frame is speed
Main reference of this frame is speed
1 Initialization valid
After drive losing destination floor signal, controller initializes drive’s present floor and main reference determines the destination floor. Function the same as terminal INI
bit8
0 Initialization invalid
1 Stop-request distance control valid
When F0.02 is 4 (com. Speed control), this bit invalid: speed control; this bit valid, stop-request distance control. In the later case, drive automatically calculates speed then, main reference invalid. Function the same as terminal DCE
bit9
0 Speed control
110 Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Control word (bit)
Value Meaning Function
1 Stop request valid
When entering stop-request distance control (DCE valid), this bit invalid: drive runs fast; valid: drive decelerates to stop. In the later case, drive realizes distance controlled leveling. Function the same as terminal REQ
bit10
0 Stop request invalid
1 Autolearning valid
Indicates autolearing enabled. Function the same as terminal SL bit11
0 Autolearning invalid
1 Inspection running valid
Indicates inspection running mode. Function the same as terminal INS bit12
0 Inspection running invalid
1 Battery mode valid
Indicates battery driven mode. Function the same as terminal BAT bit13
0 Battery mode invalid
Others 0 Reserved Bit definition of drive status word State word (Bit)
Value Meaning Remark
1 Elevator DOWN bit0
0 Elevator UP Elevator present running direction
1 Drive ready for running
Drive needs to get ready before accepting running commands
bit1
0 No running preparation 1 Running
bit2 0 Standby
Drive state
1 Drive faulty Drive being faulty bit3
0 Drive normal Drive okay for running
1 Elevator stop signal valid Upon elevator stop, drive outputs an 2s wide pulse signal bit4
0 Elevator stop signal invalid
1 Frequency detected signal 1 valid
Speed detection 1 signal
bit5 0
Frequency detected signal invalid
1 Frequency detected signal 2 valid
Frequency detected signal 2
bit6 0
Frequency detected signal 2 invalid
bit7 0 Reserved
State word (Bit)
Value Meaning Remark
1 Setting being in allowed range bit8
0 Setting outside allowed range
1 Autolearning Elevator in autolearning state bit9
0 Non-autolearning
1 Running at zero speed Drive running at zero speed bit10
0 Running at non-zero speed 1 Dec. point passed signal valid
bit110
Dec. point passed signal invalid
Dec. point passed signal
1 Running contactor output valid
bit120
Running contactor output invalid
Running contactor output
1 Door pre-open signal valid bit13
0 Door pre-open signal invalid Door pre-open signal
1 Brake output valid bit14
0 Brake output invalid Brake output
bit15 0 Reserved EV3100 main reference
Control word bit7
Value Description
0 Speed corresponds to function code V0 1 Speed corresponds to function code V1 2 Speed corresponds to function code V2 3 Speed corresponds to function code V3 4 Speed corresponds to function code V4 5 Speed corresponds to function code V5 6 Speed corresponds to function code V6
0
7 Speed corresponds to function code V7 0 Invalid
1 Non-zero Floor number
In distance control mode, EV3100 drive replies present floor; in speed control, present speed; when faulty, fault code.
EV3100 actual value of main reference Drive state Actual value Content
Faulty Fault code When faulty, the actual operation data turns into the fault code
Distance control
The highest bit is 1, other bits in combination stands for floor No.
In distance control, the actual operation data turns into the present floor, BIT15 = 1
Nor
mal
Speed control
The highest bit is 0, other bits in combination stands for speed
In speed control, the actual operation data turns into the present speed, BIT15 = 0
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol 111
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
6 Note:
1. For data frame of ASCII format, if the length of the whole message is an even number, it will be discarded.
2. The communication will be interrupted during restoring to default parameters or auto-tuning.
3. The parameters F0.09, F1.11 and F0.00 cannot be modified through communication. But F0.00 (password) can be verified through WRITE command.
4. If several multi-function terminals are set to the same function, error will occur. Please note that when modifying functions using MODBUS protocol.
7 CRC Check
For higher speed, CRC-16 uses tables. The following are C language source code for CRC-16. Note that the result has been exchanged MSB and LSB, i.e., it is the final CRC checksum to be sent out.
The C language source code for CRC checksum: unsigned short CRC16 (unsigned char *msg, unsigned char length) /* The function returns the CRC as a unsigned short type */ unsigned char uchCRCHi = 0xFF ; /* high byte of CRC initialized */ unsigned char uchCRCLo = 0xFF ; /* low byte of CRC initialized */ unsigned uIndex ; /* index into CRC lookup table */ while (length--) /* pass through message buffer */ uIndex = uchCRCLo ^ *msg++ ; /* calculate the CRC */ uchCRCLo = uchCRCHi ^ (crcvalue[uIndex] >>8) ; uchCRCHi =crcvalue[uIndex]&0xff; return (uchCRCHi | uchCRCLo<<8) ; /* Table of CRC values */
const unsigned int crcvalue[ ] = 0x0000, 0xC1C0, 0x81C1, 0x4001, 0x01C3, 0xC003, 0x8002, 0x41C2, 0x01C6, 0xC006, 0x8007, 0x41C7, 0x0005, 0xC1C5, 0x81C4, 0x4004, 0x01CC, 0xC00C, 0x800D, 0x41CD, 0x000F, 0xC1CF, 0x81CE, 0x400E, 0x000A, 0xC1CA, 0x81CB, 0x400B, 0x01C9, 0xC009, 0x8008, 0x41C8, 0x01D8, 0xC018, 0x8019, 0x41D9, 0x001B, 0xC1DB, 0x81DA, 0x401A, 0x001E, 0xC1DE, 0x81DF, 0x401F, 0x01DD, 0xC01D, 0x801C, 0x41DC, 0x0014, 0xC1D4, 0x81D5, 0x4015, 0x01D7, 0xC017, 0x8016, 0x41D6, 0x01D2, 0xC012, 0x8013, 0x41D3, 0x0011, 0xC1D1, 0x81D0, 0x4010, 0x01F0, 0xC030, 0x8031, 0x41F1, 0x0033, 0xC1F3, 0x81F2, 0x4032, 0x0036, 0xC1F6, 0x81F7, 0x4037, 0x01F5, 0xC035, 0x8034, 0x41F4, 0x003C, 0xC1FC, 0x81FD, 0x403D, 0x01FF, 0xC03F, 0x803E, 0x41FE, 0x01FA, 0xC03A, 0x803B, 0x41FB, 0x0039, 0xC1F9, 0x81F8, 0x4038, 0x0028, 0xC1E8, 0x81E9, 0x4029, 0x01EB, 0xC02B, 0x802A, 0x41EA, 0x01EE, 0xC02E, 0x802F, 0x41EF, 0x002D, 0xC1ED, 0x81EC, 0x402C, 0x01E4, 0xC024, 0x8025, 0x41E5, 0x0027, 0xC1E7, 0x81E6, 0x4026, 0x0022, 0xC1E2, 0x81E3, 0x4023, 0x01E1, 0xC021, 0x8020, 0x41E0, 0x01A0, 0xC060, 0x8061, 0x41A1, 0x0063, 0xC1A3, 0x81A2, 0x4062, 0x0066, 0xC1A6, 0x81A7, 0x4067, 0x01A5, 0xC065, 0x8064, 0x41A4, 0x006C, 0xC1AC, 0x81AD, 0x406D, 0x01AF, 0xC06F, 0x806E, 0x41AE, 0x01AA, 0xC06A, 0x806B, 0x41AB, 0x0069, 0xC1A9, 0x81A8, 0x4068, 0x0078, 0xC1B8, 0x81B9, 0x4079, 0x01BB, 0xC07B, 0x807A, 0x41BA, 0x01BE, 0xC07E, 0x807F, 0x41BF, 0x007D, 0xC1BD, 0x81BC, 0x407C, 0x01B4, 0xC074, 0x8075, 0x41B5, 0x0077, 0xC1B7, 0x81B6, 0x4076, 0x0072, 0xC1B2, 0x81B3, 0x4073, 0x01B1, 0xC071, 0x8070, 0x41B0, 0x0050, 0xC190, 0x8191, 0x4051, 0x0193, 0xC053, 0x8052, 0x4192, 0x0196, 0xC056, 0x8057, 0x4197, 0x0055, 0xC195, 0x8194, 0x4054, 0x019C, 0xC05C, 0x805D, 0x419D, 0x005F, 0xC19F, 0x819E, 0x405E, 0x005A, 0xC19A, 0x819B, 0x405B, 0x0199, 0xC059, 0x8058, 0x4198, 0x0188, 0xC048, 0x8049, 0x4189, 0x004B, 0xC18B, 0x818A, 0x404A, 0x004E, 0xC18E, 0x818F, 0x404F, 0x018D, 0xC04D, 0x804C, 0x418C, 0x0044, 0xC184, 0x8185, 0x4045, 0x0187, 0xC047, 0x8046, 0x4186, 0x0182, 0xC042, 0x8043, 0x4183, 0x0041, 0xC181, 0x8180, 0x4040
Online calculating the CRC checksum of each sent character needs more time, but less program space. The routine for calculating CRC online is as follows:
unsigned int crc_check (unsigned char *data, unsigned char length)
112 Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
int i;
unsigned crc_result=0xffff;
while (length--)
crc_result^=*data++;
for (i=0;i<8;i++)
if (crc_result&0x01)
crc_result= (crc_result>>1) ^0xa001;
else
crc_result=crc_result>>1;
return (crc_result= ( (crc_result&0xff) <<8) | (crc_result>>8) ) ;
8 Application
Note: To control the drive through communication, check the hardware connection and EN terminal first. Then set drive’s communication data format, baud rate and communication address.
1. Drive 5 runs UP at MS 2 (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5):
Address Function
code Register Address Register number
Register bytes number
Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x001D, 0x0002 0xBA39 Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
2. Drive 5 runs DOWN at MS 2 (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address Register number
Register bytes number
Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x001F, 0x0002 0x1BF9 Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
3. Drive 5 stops (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x001C, 0x0003 0x2A39 Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
4. Drive 5 runs in autolearning mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x080D, 0x0000 0x385D Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
5. Drive 5 runs UP in inspection mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x100D, 0x0000 0x3EFD Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
6. Drive 5 runs DOWN in inspection mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Appendix 2 Communication Protocol 113
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x100F, 0x0000 0x9F3D Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
7. Drive 5 has emergency stop in inspection running mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x100B, 0x0000 0xDEFC Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
8. Drive 5 runs UP in battery driven mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x200D, 0x0000 0x31FD Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
9. Drive 5 runs DOWN in battery driven mode (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x200F, 0x0000 0x903D Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
10. Stop-request distance control (UP, without stop request) (in this case, set F0.02 to 4)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x020D, 0x0000 0x3B85 Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
11. Stop-request distance control (UP, with stop-request) (in this case, set F0.02 to 4)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x060D, 0x0000 0x3AB5 Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
12. Communication distance control (run UP to the 7th floor) (in this case, set F0.02 to 5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x00AD, 0x0007 0x7BDD Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
13. Communication fault reset (in this case, set F0.02 to 4/5)
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 0x04 0x0040, 0x0000 0xAA2A Response 0x05 0x10 0x3200 0x0002 None None 0x4EF4
14. Read drive 5 function code F0.07
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x03 0x0007 0x0001 None None 0x344F Response 0x05 0x03 None None 0x02 0x0008 0x4842
114 Appendix 2 Communication Protocol
EV3100 Variable Speed Drive For Elevator User Manual
15. Modify drive 5 function code F8.04 to 0.005s, not save upon power off
Address Function
code Register Address
Register numberRegister bytes
number Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x06 0x0804 None None 0x0005 0x0BEC Response 0x05 0x06 0x0804 None None 0x0005 0x0BEC
16. Modify drive 5 function code F8.04 to 0.005s, save upon power off
Address Function
code Register Address
Register number
Register bytes number
Register contents Checksum
Request 0x05 0x41 0x0804 None None 0x0005 0xBFE3 Response 0x05 0x41 0x0804 None None 0x0005 0xBFE3
9 Scaling
1) Frequency scaling: 1: 100
To run drive at 50Hz, the main reference should be 0x1388 (5000).
2) Time scaling: 1: 10
To set drive acceleration time to 30s, the function code should be set to 0x012c (300).
3) Current scaling: 1: 10
If drive feedback current is 0x012c, drive’s present current is 30A.
4) Output power is an absolute value
5) AI1 zero bias adjust and the 0 ~ 1000 (communication reference or read value) of AI2 zero bias adjust correspond to the actual -500 ~ 500mV
6) For others (like terminal input and output), refer to user manual
Emerson Network Power Co. Ltd.
Maintenance Record (1) Customer’s company:
Address:
Post Code: Contact person:
Tel: Fax:
Drive’s SN:
Power: Model:
Contract number: Purchasing Date:
Service provider:
Contact person: Tel:
Servicing engineer: Tel:
Maintenance date:
Customer’s comments on service quality: Excellent Satisfactory Acceptable Unsatisfactory Other Opinions: Signature: DD MM YYYY
Visiting Record of Customer Service Center: by phone-calls by questionnaire Others: Signature: DD MM YYYY(date)
Note: This paper becomes invalid if the user cannot be revisited!
Emerson Network Power Co. Ltd.
Maintenance Record (2) Customer’s company:
Address
Post Code: Contact person:
Tel: Fax:
Drive’s SN:
Power: Model:
Contract NO. Purchasing Date:
Service provider:
Contact person: Tel:
Servicing person : Tel:
Maintenance date:
Customer’s comments on service quality: Excellent Satisfactory Acceptable Unsatisfactory Other Opinions: User’s Signature: DD MM YYYY
Visiting Record of Customer Service Center: by phone-calls by questionnaire Others: Signature: DD MM YYYY(date)
Note: This paper becomes invalid if the user cannot be revisited!
Notice
1. The warranty range is confined to the drive only.
2. Warranty period is 18 months, within which period Emerson Network Power conducts free maintenance and repairing to the drive that has any fault or damage under the normal operation conditions.
3. The start time of warranty period is the delivery date of the product, of which the product SN is the sole basis of judgment. Drives without a product SN shall be regarded as out of warranty.
4. Even within 18 months, maintenance will also be charged in the following situations:
Damages incurred to the drive due to mis-operations, which are not in compliance with the User Manual;
Damages incurred to the drive due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, etc;
Damages incurred to the drive due to the improper use of drive functions.
5.The service fee will be charged according to the actual costs. If there is any contract, the contract prevails.
6.Please keep this paper and show this paper to the maintenance unit when the product needs to be repaired.
7. If you have any question, please contact the distributor or our company directly.
ENP Services China Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
Address: NO.6 Keyuan Road, 3F.SSIP Building. Shenzhen Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District, 518057, Shenzhen, PRC
Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581
Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800
Notice
1. The warranty range is confined to the drive only.
2. Warranty period is 18 months, within which period Emerson Network Power conducts free maintenance and repairing to the drive that has any fault or damage under the normal operation conditions.
3. The start time of warranty period is the delivery date of the product, of which the product SN is the sole basis of judgment. Drives without a product SN shall be regarded as out of warranty.
4. Even within 18 months, maintenance should also be charged in case of the following situations:
Damages incurred to the drive due to mis-operations which are not in compliance with the User Manual;
Damages incurred to the drive due to fire, flood, abnormal voltage, etc;
Damages incurred to the drive due to the improper use of drive functions.
5.The service fee will be charged according to the actual costs. If there is any contract, the contract prevails.
6.Please keep this paper and show this paper to the maintenance unit when the product needs to be repaired.
7. If you have any question, please contact the distributor or our company directly.
ENP Services China Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
Address: NO.6 Keyuan Road, 3F.SSIP Building. Shenzhen Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District, 518057, Shenzhen, PRC
Customer Service Hotline: +86 755 86010581
Complaint Hotline: +86 755 86010800
To Customers:
Thank you for choosing our products. We are expecting your comments about the quality of the products, so that we can improve our work and serve you better. We really appreciate if you would fill in the form after the product has operated for 1 month, and then mail or fax it to the Customer Service Center of Emerson Network Power. We will send you an exquisite souvenir upon the receipt of the completed Product Quality Feedback Paper. You will receive a special gift if you can give us any advices on improving the product and service quality.
Customer Service Dept
Emerson Network Power Co., Ltd.
Product Quality Feedback Form User’s name Tel:
Address Post code
Product model Installation date
Product SN
Product outline or structure
Product performance
Product package
Product manual
Product quality condition in using
Your advices on product improvement
Address: NO.6 Keyuan Road, 3F.SSIP Building. Shenzhen Science & Industry Park, Nanshan District, 518057, Shenzhen, PRC
Tel: +86 755 86010581